JP6011596B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that starts when a ball enters (wins) the entrance (starting entrance). For example, the effective display area has a total of 3 or 3 × 3 cells horizontally or vertically. Nine symbols and the like are displayed, and the symbols and the like displayed based on a predetermined game condition are scrolled. When the scrolling stops, the stop symbols are in a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. it is intended to generate an equivalent or when.

Further, during the scrolling of the symbol or the like, sometimes advantageous game state for the player with high probability than normal (e.g., those Tari) interest effect suggests that a pre (e.g., such effects by Reach Display ) Has also been devised to give players a sense of expectation for an advantageous game. The effect of reach display is, for example, by stopping the left and right two symbol rows among the three symbol rows being scrolled at a predetermined symbol, and then scrolling the middle one symbol row at a low speed, On the other hand, this is an effect that gives a sense of expectation to stop at a predetermined combination of stop symbols. The effect by the reach display is performed for a longer time than the normal variation effect (variation effect without the reach display) in order to give the player a higher expectation.
Now, there is also known a gaming machine that suggests a transition to an advantageous gaming state as a pattern of an entertaining effect by an effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect”) that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable effects. Yes.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, the conventional gaming machine that performs the continuous notice effect has a problem that the interest in stopping the symbol in the variable effect is low.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest in stopping the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information . .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition, and an acquisition means for acquiring information when the start condition is detected by the detection means. And selecting means for selecting the type of dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and selecting by the selecting means in response to an instruction from the main control means Sub-control means having dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the type of dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification executed by the dynamic display execution means When a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the dynamic display of information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the main control means displays the identification information dynamically . Control A transmitting means for transmitting to said sub-control means a predetermined command for the sub-control means can store the dynamic display standby number of the identification information performed by the dynamic display execution means based on said receiving a predetermined command sent by the transmission means, the dynamic display of the identification information of the stored within the waiting times, setting means for setting feasible a predetermined effect, the is intended to perform a dynamic display of the identification information and a determination means for dynamic display type of the identification information to perform pre-Symbol predetermined effect based on the setting of the setting means, said determination When the type of the dynamic display of identification information is determined by the means to be a predetermined type, the dynamic display of the identification information within the time allotted to the dynamic display type of the predetermined identification information Pseudo Includes a pseudo variation execution means Do stop executes dynamic display of the identification information to divide the row, when not executing the predetermined effect, a predetermined voice in accordance with the dynamic display of stop of the identification information means for generating, when the predetermined effect is executable set by the setting unit based on received said predetermined command transmitted by the transmission means, the dynamic display of stop of the identification information In addition, a sound different from the predetermined sound is generated, and a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information, or the predetermined movable effect means is movable or predetermined by the predetermined illumination means. means for executing the emission effect, when said dynamic display pseudo stop of said identification information by a pseudo change executing means dividing line, the predetermined in accordance with the dynamic display pseudo stop of the identification information Means for generating a sound different from the sound , the pseudo-variation executing means comprises a plurality of types of times that the dynamic display can be stopped in a pseudo manner in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the setting means And means for setting execution of the predetermined effect when the number of standby times of the dynamic display of the stored identification information is a predetermined number or more .

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition, acquisition means for obtaining information when the detection means detects establishment of the start condition, and acquisition by the acquisition means A main control means having a selection means for selecting the type of dynamic display of the identification information based on the received information, and the movement of the identification information selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. Sub-control means having dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the type of automatic display, and in advance in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means When a predetermined combination of identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the main control means sends a predetermined command for controlling the dynamic display of the identification information. Previous Transmission means for transmitting to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is capable of storing the number of standby times of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and transmitted by the transmission means Setting means for setting a predetermined effect to be executable in the dynamic display of the identification information within the stored number of standby times based on receiving the predetermined command, and the dynamic display of the identification information movement of a determining means for determining the type is intended to perform a dynamic display of the identification information to perform pre-Symbol predetermined effect based on the setting of the setting means, the identification information by said determining means When it is determined that the target display type is the predetermined type, the dynamic display of the identification information is pseudo-stopped during the time allotted to the dynamic display type of the predetermined identification information. to divide row Includes a pseudo variation execution means for executing a dynamic display of the serial identification information, when not executing the predetermined effect, means for generating a predetermined voice in accordance with the dynamic display of stop of the identification information, the transmission when the predetermined effect is executable set by the setting unit based on received said predetermined commands sent by unit, the predetermined voice in accordance with the dynamic display of stop of the identification information Generating a different sound and executing a predetermined effect display in accordance with the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information or moving a predetermined movable effect means or executing a predetermined light-emitting effect by a predetermined illumination means , when said dynamic display pseudo stop of said identification information by a pseudo change executing means dividing line, generating a sound different from the predetermined voice in accordance with the dynamic display pseudo stop of the identification information And the pseudo-variation executing means includes a plurality of types of times that the dynamic display can be stopped in a pseudo manner in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the setting means includes the stored identification information. Since the means for setting the execution of the predetermined effect is provided when the number of standby times of the dynamic display is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the interest in stopping the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of a pending | holding frequency command. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the continuous notice mode flag. It is explanatory drawing explaining the kind of effect aspect of the change effect to which execution of the continuous notice effect was set. It is a timing chart of a normal normal reach fluctuation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo fluctuation effect distributed from the normal reach fluctuation mode. It is a timing chart of a normal super reach variation mode and a production mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the super reach variation mode. It is a timing chart with the normal special reach fluctuation aspect and the production | presentation aspect of the pseudo fluctuation effect distributed from the special reach fluctuation aspect. (A) is a timing chart of the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second revariation” mode performed in the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is the “2 second shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 second revariation” mode. (C) is a timing chart of the “2 second shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous announcement setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp matching apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change production process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation distribution process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation distribution process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change production setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 according to an embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the effect pattern of the variable display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect. Operated.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the state is changing by a lighting state, or when a start winning is given as a stop symbol after the end of the change (when entering the first entrance 64). A symbol corresponding to a lottery result (first probability variation jackpot, second probability variation jackpot, hourly / temporary bonus jackpot, or disengagement) is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of holding times is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  The above-mentioned “first probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. Is a probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds. The “short-time jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a maximum of 15 rounds and hits a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

  Here, the “high probability state” means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability has increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state. It is the state of the game. Further, the high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. In addition, the short-time state (short-time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 64. In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 to be opened or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases by hit.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. For example, three symbol sequences of left, middle and right are displayed. The Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one type of sub-shaped petal shape formed smaller than this main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The display is changed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on one of the active lines at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, the same Jackpot animations are displayed as jackpots.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are normally covered with a double-open opaque door 87 that is electrically opened and closed by a door solenoid 87a (see FIG. 5), and sometimes the door solenoid 87a is excited to open the door. 87 is a display area that is visible to the player when opened to the front side. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors 87 are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. When either one of the left and right doors 87 or both doors 87 are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3, and it is easy for the player to make a transition to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, but the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed. In addition, as one aspect of the notice effect, the player can perform a variable display of the third symbol in the sub display area Ds and display one drama scene, a music promotion video, etc. in the main display area Dm. It is also possible to suggest that the state is more likely to make a transition to jackpot than usual.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of probability variation big hit symbol, hour and junior big hit symbol, or off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the second symbol display device 83 changes the display symbol (second symbol) by alternately lighting the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X”. The first entrance 64 is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined time when the display is stopped and the change display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”). Yes. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). Moreover, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). Further, the RAM 203 has a hold count counter 203a. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 16), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 15) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The number-of-holds counter 203a holds the number of times of waiting (the number of waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64. ) Is counted up to 4 times. The initial value of the number-of-holding counter 203a is set to zero, and 1 is added to a maximum value of 4 each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of times the variable display is held increases ( (See S603 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the hold number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time a variable display based on winning of a ball at the first entrance 64 is executed (see S304 in FIG. 17).

  The addition of the hold count counter 203a is performed in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. That is, every time the timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201, the start winning process (see S504 in FIG. 19) is executed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning of a ball at the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 19). (See S601 in FIG. 20). When it is determined that there is a ball winning at the first entrance 64 (S601 in FIG. 20: Yes), the hold count counter 203a is incremented by 1 to the maximum value 4 (see S603 in FIG. 20).

  The value of the hold count counter 203a (that is, the hold count) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold count command (see S611 in FIG. 20). The number-of-holds command is a 2-byte (16 bits) transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time a ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the hold number counter 203a is incremented by one. ) Configuration command. The voice lamp control device 113 lights up the number of the hold lamps 85 corresponding to the number of hold times based on the value of the hold number counter 203a notified by the hold number command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the configuration of the pending number command will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the bit configuration of the hold count command. In the following description, in the 2-byte command, the upper byte is referred to as the upper byte, and the lower byte is referred to as the lower byte. In each byte, the most significant bit (MSB) is assumed to be “seventh bit” and the least significant bit (LSB) is assumed to be “0th bit”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte are composed of a fixed value “0111” (binary number), and this command is a hold count command. It shows that. The voice lamp control device 113 confirms the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte in the command received from the main control device 110, and receives it when the value is “0111” (binary number). It can be recognized that the received command is a hold count command (see S1007 in FIG. 24).

  Also, in the hold count command, the lower byte is composed of the hold count. When the main controller 110 transmits a hold count command to the voice lamp controller 113, the main controller 110 sets the value of the hold count counter 203a incremented by one by winning a ball to the first entrance 64 to the lower order of the hold count command. Fit the 2nd to 0th bit of the byte. In addition, 0 is set in all the seventh to third bits of the lower byte of the hold count command. Accordingly, the entire number of lower bytes of the number-of-holds command can represent the number of times of variation effect held in the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball at the first entrance 64.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the hold count of the variation effect (variation display) held in the main control device 110 from the lower byte of the received hold count command. The value is stored in the hold count counter 23a of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1008 in FIG. 24). In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the number of suspensions of the variable effect held in the main control unit 110 by the hold number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 every time the hold number counter 203a is incremented by one. The value can be obtained. As a result, the number of suspensions of the variation effect managed by the number-of-holds counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of suspensions of the variation effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even in this case, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending number command received.

  On the other hand, the number-of-holds command also serves as a continuous notice permission command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 whether or not to allow the third symbol display device 81 to display the continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notices) that the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit, and is suspended at the time of the winning. This is an effect in which the same third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the changing effects. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against.

  In the present embodiment, a combination of predetermined third symbols (for example, as shown in FIG. 4) is used as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect (variation display) is ended in the third symbol display device 81. This is done by displaying so-called “chance eyes” in which the combination of the main symbols on the middle line L2 is “3” “4” “1”) in order from the left symbol row Z1. Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. Moreover, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as a stop symbol and the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), or the short-term jackpot does not appear, By making it appear, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot can be obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect, and to give the player the motivation to continue the game.

  Whether the display of the continuous notice effect is permitted or not on the third symbol display device 81 is determined every time the main control device 110 wins a ball to the first entrance 64 and the hold counter 203a is incremented by 1. To be done. That is, when the number-of-holds counter 203a is incremented by 1 by the start winning process (see FIG. 20) performed in the timer interruption process executed by the MPU 201, the third symbol display device 81 is subsequently subjected to the continuous notice effect. It is determined whether or not display is permitted. As described above, the addition of the hold number counter 203a and the determination as to whether or not to allow the third symbol display device 81 to display the continuous notice effect are performed at the same timing. Therefore, by including the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count) and the determination result of the display permission of the continuous notice effect in one hold count command, it is possible to reduce the number of command transmissions. Increase in burden can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the role of the continuous notice permission command in the hold number command is as follows. As shown in FIG. 6, the continuous notice permission flag represented by the first bit of the upper byte of the hold number command and the continuous notice represented by the 0th bit of the upper byte. This is done by the after game state flag. The continuous notice permission flag indicates whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is permitted to display a continuous notice effect (that is, a chance eye). When the value is “1”, the third symbol display device is displayed. 81 indicates that the display of the continuous notice effect is permitted. In the case of “0”, it indicates that the display of the continuous notice effect is not permitted on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the game state flag after continuous notice is based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of winning a ball at the first entrance 64 serving as a transmission trigger of the hold number command after the end of the continuous notice effect. A flag indicating whether the gaming state to be determined is “hit” or “out of game”. When the flag is “1”, it represents “hit”, and when it is “0” Indicates "out".

  The setting of the continuous notice permission flag and the post-continuous notice game state flag is performed based on the game state determined based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of winning the ball at the first entrance 64. That is, if the result of the lottery is “15R probable big hit”, the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” and the game state flag after continuous notice is set to “1” (see S607 in FIG. 20). In the case of “reach”, the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1”, and the game state flag after continuous notice is set to “0” (see S609 in FIG. 20). In other cases, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “0” and the game state flag after continuous notice is set to “0” (see S610 in FIG. 20). In this way, when the jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, or even if it is out of reach, the reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot ( The value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” only in the case of “rear and forward reach”. Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, a high sense of expectation can be given to a player.

  When the number-of-holds command is received by the sound lamp controller 113, the sound lamp controller 113 confirms the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the number-of-holds command, and the value is “ If “1” and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see FIG. 25).

  Here, the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied means a case where any one of the following (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. First, (Condition 1) is that execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all the variable effects reserved in the main control device 110 (see S1105: Yes in FIG. 25). That is, if the value of the continuous notice permission flag included in the received number-of-holds command is “1” and the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all of the suspended variation effects, it is continuous with a predetermined probability. The start of the notice effect is determined.

  (Condition 2) is that execution of a continuous notice effect is set in at least a part of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110, and the continuous notice effect is performed in all the fluctuating effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. The game state after the change effect that is executed after the game is “big hit”, and the change effect (holding ball) corresponding to the hold number included in the hold number command and the execution of the continuous notice effect are set last. There are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between the fluctuating effects (holding balls) (that is, the difference between the value of the holding number counter 223a described later and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is three or more. (S1105: No, S1106: Yes, S1108: Yes in FIG. 25).

  That is, when the value of the continuous notice permission flag included in the received number-of-holds command is “1”, execution of the continuous notice effect is set to at least a part of the variable effects already held, and the continuous notice is set. When the game state after the change effect executed after the effect is performed is “big hit”, the change effect (holding ball) corresponding to the hold number included in the received hold number command and execution of the continuous notice effect Only when there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) set to "", the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability. It should be noted that whether or not the game state after the change effect executed after the continuous notice effect is “big hit” is determined by a state flag 223d after continuous notice provided in the RAM 223 of the audio display control device 113 described later. Judged by value.

  In this case, since the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is once in the “hit” state after the last variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is performed, the player has a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. It will be interrupted once by "big hit". In such a state, 1 between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of holds included in the received number-of-holds command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. When there is only one fluctuating effect (holding ball), if the execution of the continuous notice effect is newly set for that one fluctuating effect, the expectation by the continuous notice effect is temporarily interrupted by the “big hit” Later, since the chance chance is displayed only once, the player may not be able to recognize the continuous notice effect, or the player may be less expected of the continuous notice effect. In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of times of suspension included in the received number-of-holds command and the last variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set ( When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined because the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between Will always display the chance for two or more fluctuating effects after the “big hit”. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the continuous notice effect, and the expectation for the continuous notice effect can be strengthened, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  (Condition 3) is that execution of the continuous notice effect is set in at least a part of the fluctuating effects held in the main control device 110, and the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. The game state after the fluctuating effect that is executed after the release is “disappear”, and the game state after the continuous notice effect that is newly notified of permission by the hold count command is “big hit” (S1105 in FIG. 25). : No, S1106: No, S1109: Yes). That is, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set to at least a part of the already changed variation effect, and the game state after the change effect that is executed after the continuous notice effect is performed becomes “out”. The start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the gaming state after the continuous notice effect newly notified of permission by the number-of-holds command becomes “big hit”. Note that whether or not the gaming state after the continuous notice effect set for the variable effect that has already been put on is “disconnected” is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio display control device 113 described later. Judgment is made based on the value of the state flag 223d after continuous notice. Further, whether or not the gaming state after the continuous notice effect for which permission has been newly notified by the number-of-holds command is “big hit” is the 0th bit of the upper byte of the number-of-holds command (that is, the game state flag after the continuous notice) ) Is “1” or not.

  In this case, after the previously set continuous notice effect is performed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a “disconnected” state. In such a state, the game state after the continuous notice effect is “disconnected”. If a new continuous notice effect is set, the result will be that the player will continue to be out of play even though the continuous notice effect will continue. is there. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the continuous advance notice is performed with a predetermined probability only when the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect in which the permission is newly notified by the hold number command becomes “big hit”. The start of production is determined. As a result, if the gaming state after the continuous notice effect that is newly notified by the hold number command is “out”, the start of the continuous notice effect is not determined, so the continuous notice effect is continued. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the “disconnected” state from continuing, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of expectation from being hindered. In addition, after the previously set continuous notice effect is performed, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “disconnected” state, and the continuous notice effect is subsequently performed, the player is given a “big hit”. It is possible to give a strong sense of expectation, and to give the player the motivation to continue the game. In this way, the game state after the change effect that is executed after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set, and after the continuous notice effect that is newly notified by the hold count command Based on the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is added according to the expectation received by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced for the player.

  On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 has a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice probability”) for determining the start of the continuous notice effect to be the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (that is, after the continuous notice effect). It is configured to be changed according to the value of (game state flag) (see S1111 to S1113 in FIG. 25). This change in the predetermined probability will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thus, in the process related to the continuous notice effect, the main control device 110 performs only the permission judgment of the continuous notice effect based on the result of the determination performed when the ball is won at the first entrance 64, The determination result is included in the hold count command as a continuous notice permission flag and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the actual start of the continuous notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous notice effect based on the value of the continuous notice permission flag of the number-of-holds command. Thereby, the process in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the processing capability MPU 221 is used for the audio lamp control device 113, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect can be set in a wide variety.

  Further, in the main control device 110, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot) which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, or even if it is off, one step before the jackpot against the player When it is a reach that gives the impression that it is (a back and forth reach), a continuous notice permission flag for permitting a continuous notice effect is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 and included in the number-of-holds command. That is, not only in the case where the lottery result is a big hit, but also in the back and forth reach, the main controller 110 allows the continuous notice effect and the information is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113. The execution of the continuous notice effect can also be determined in the case of a back and forth reach. As a result, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, it is possible to have a high expectation to the player by performing the continuous notice effect, and the player is bored. Can be prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, various types of switches and sensors not shown. The switch 208 is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, hold lamp 85, etc.) 227 It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a variation effect (variation display) and a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a continuous notice determination table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with a holding number counter 223a, a continuous notice determination counter 223b, a continuous notice number counter 223c, a state flag 223d after continuous notice, a continuous notice mode flag 223e, and an effect form counter 223f. Here, for convenience of explanation, the continuous notice determination counter 223b will be described first, and then the continuous notice determination table 222a, the hold number counter 223a, the continuous notice number counter 223c, the continuous notice state flag 223d, the continuous notice mode flag 223e, The effect mode counter 223f will be described in this order.

  The continuous notice determination counter 223b is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once every time the command determination process (see FIG. 24) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous notice determination counter 223b is updated, for example, by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127).

  When the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 110 is “1” and the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the voice lamp control device 113 satisfies The start of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b and the continuous notice determination table 222a described below (see S1114 and S1115 in FIG. 25).

  The continuous notice determination table 222a is displayed when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main controller 110 is “1”, that is, from the main controller 110 to the third symbol display device. 81 is a table for setting “continuous notice determination probability” when there is a notification permitting display of a continuous notice effect in 81 and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is the probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect when a notification permitting display of the continuous notice effect is received and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is. The audio lamp control device 113 compares the continuous notice determination table 222a with the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b. When the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is within the range indicated by the continuous notice determination table 222a, It is determined that the symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect (see S1114 and S1115 in FIG. 25).

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 7, the continuous notice determination table 222a has two tables, a big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and a losing time continuous notice determination table 222a2. When the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main controller 110 is “1” and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command. In accordance with the 0th bit of the upper byte (game state flag after continuous notice), one of the two tables in the continuous notice determination table 222a is selected as a table used for setting the continuous notice determination probability. That is, when the game state flag after continuous notice is “1” (the game state after the end of continuous notice effect is “big hit”), the big success time continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected, and the game state flag after continuous notice is “0”. "(The game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is" out "), the out-of-line continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected (see S1111 to S1113 in FIG. 25). Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit” or “out”).

  Both the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2 can be taken by the number-of-holds counter 223a in the sound lamp control device 113 (the number of times of variation effects held in the main control device 110). The range of the continuous notice determination counter 223b for determining the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) is defined in association with the values “1” to “4”.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot time continuous notice determination table 222a1 defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the hold number counter 223a, and the value of the hold number counter 223a. “0” to 15 is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with “2”, “0 to 39” is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the hold count counter 223a, and the hold In association with the value “4” of the number counter 223a, “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  Further, the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2 associates with the value “1” of the hold count counter 223a, defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range, and associates with the value “2” of the hold count counter 223a. “0-9” is defined as the continuous notice determination range, “0-25” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the hold count counter 223a, and the value “ In association with “4”, “0 to 39” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  The voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold count command from the main control device 110, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is “1”, and satisfies a predetermined condition In this case, if one of the big success time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability, the selected current notice determination table 222a2 The continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the holding number counter 223a is specified, and when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b at that time is included in the continuous notice determination range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Now, in both the big hit continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the out-of-run continuous notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 7, the continuous notice determination range is specified to be wider as the value of the holding number counter 223a is larger. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, and the probability of continuous notice determination increases, so that the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2 are both It can be said that the higher the number of suspensions of the variable display in the main control device 110, the higher the continuous notice determination probability. Here, since the continuous notice effect is performed over all the fluctuating effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined, the higher the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice determination probability becomes. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of suspensions of variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of suspensions is small, it can be suppressed so that continuous notice effects are not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the outage continuous notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 7 are compared, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the same number-of-holds counter 223a is the big hit time continuous The advance notice determination table 222a1 is defined to be the same or wider than the out-of-run continuous notice determination table 222a2. That is, the probability of continuous notice determination when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “big hit” is the same as or more than the probability of decision of continuous notice when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out” Is set to be higher. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state is likely to become a “hit” after the end of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to give a high sense of expectation to the player. Also, normally, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the lottery performed when winning the ball at the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is more than the probability of “losing”. Is set to a small value, so if the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. The continuous notice effect can be easily performed.

  In addition, in the main control device 110, whether or not the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot or a back-and-forth outreach is determined to permit the continuous notice effect. The determination result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as a continuous notice permission flag of the hold count command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even in the case of forward / backward reach or the like, according to the determination result (the value of the continuous notice permission flag of the hold count command) and various conditions. Since it is possible, execution of the continuous notice effect can be performed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, since the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The number-of-holds counter 223 a in the RAM 223 is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the number of variable effect holds on the main control device 110. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times (the number of standby times). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a variable display hold number is added by winning a ball at the first entrance 64, the number of hold times is received. The value of the hold count counter 203a of the main control device 110 (that is, the hold count of the variable effect held in the main control device 110) stored in the lower byte of the command is extracted, and the extracted value is used as the hold count counter. It is stored in 223a (see S1008 in FIG. 24). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command that is a variation display instruction command from the main control device 110 and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception, the voice lamp control device 113 holds The value of the number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1211 in FIG. 26). Thus, since the value of the hold count counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold count counter 203a of the main control device 110.

  The value of the holding number counter 223a is used for lighting processing of the holding lamp 85. That is, among the four holding lamps 85, only the number of the holding lamps 85 corresponding to the value of the holding number counter 223a is turned on, and the remaining holding lamps 85 are turned off (see S905 in FIG. 23). In addition, the value of the hold number counter 223a is set when the continuous notice determination range is set according to the number of holds from the continuous notice determination table 222a (either one of the big hit continuous notice determination table 222a1 or the continuation notice determination table 222a2 when off). Also used for.

  The continuous notice number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The initial value of the continuous notice counter 223c is set to 0. As described above, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the hold number command received from the main controller 110, the hold number counter at that time is determined. The value of 223a is stored (see S1116 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the continuous notice counter 223c is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command which is a variation display instruction command from the main control device 110. At this time, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is a value of 2 or more, in combination with the setting of the variation effect mode, the chance symbol (the combination of the third symbol on the middle line L2 shown in FIG. 4 is a chance symbol). "3", "4", "1") are set in order from the left symbol row Z1 (see S1317 in FIG. 27). Then, the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is decremented by 1 (see S1209 in FIG. 26), and the set variation effect mode and stop symbol are set by the notification display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command. The display control device 114 is notified (see S1210 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is 0, a predetermined stop symbol is set together with the variation effect mode (see S1207 in FIG. 26), and the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command are used. The set variation effect mode and stop symbol are notified to the display control device 114 (see S1210 in FIG. 26), and the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is held at 0 (see S12 in FIG. 26). .

  In addition, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 1, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. As in the case of 0, a predetermined stop symbol is set together with the variation effect mode notified from the main control device 110 (see S1207 in FIG. 26), and the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command are used. The set variation effect mode and the stop symbol are notified to the display control device 114 (see S1210 in FIG. 26). However, the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is updated so as to decrease by 1 (see S1209 in FIG. 26).

  In this manner, every time a variation pattern command is received, the third symbol display device 81 controlled by the display control device 114 is performed in a manner in which a variation effect is set, and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223c is 2. While the value is above, the chance symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for stopping the changing effect. Here, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice number counter 223c stores the value of the hold number counter 223c at that time, and when the value is other than 0, The value is decreased by 1 in accordance with the reception of the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, all the changes that have been held in the main control device 110 before the hold of the change effect notified by the hold frequency command that is the basis for the start determination are determined. A chance chance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the effect. The chance notices are continuously displayed as stop symbols of all the fluctuation effects that have been put on hold in the main control device 110, whereby a continuous notice effect is performed. That is, the player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chances as the stop pattern of the variation effect most watched during the game. In addition, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as a stop symbol, the chances are displayed, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that a jackpot can be obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect. .

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command, if the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is “1”, the main control device 110 is informed. In order to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the suspended change effect, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is referred to (see S1105 in FIG. 25). If the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is 0 (see S1105 in FIG. 25: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all the variable effects held in the main control device 110. Of the predetermined conditions described above, it is determined that (Condition 1) is satisfied, and the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (see S1105: No in FIG. 25), at least one of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110 is a continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is further determined whether or not (Condition 2) or (Condition 3) is satisfied among the predetermined conditions described above. When the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is 1, as described above, the chance symbol is not displayed as the stop symbol on the third symbol display device, but the last change effect (ie, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set) Therefore, even if the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is 1, it is determined that the execution of the continuous horizontal production is set.

  As described above, in the processing related to the continuous notice effect, the main controller 110 performs only the permission determination of the continuous notice effect based on the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won at the first entrance 64. In the sound lamp control device 113, the actual continuous notice effect start is determined in accordance with the result of the permission determination, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the variable effect (the continuous notice effect is performed) Management of holding balls) is also performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  The state flag 223d after the continuous notice is set for a plurality of variable effects by storing the value of the hold number counter 223a in the continuous notice number counter 223c, and after the execution of all the continuous notice effects. It is a flag which shows the game state after a change production. When the value of the post-continuous notice state flag 223d is “1”, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuating effect after execution of all the continuous notice effects is the “hit” state. When the value of the state flag 223d is “0”, it indicates that the gaming state after the variation effect after the execution of all the continuous announcement effects is the “out” state. The variation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is a change effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 1.

  The state flag 223d after the continuous notice is set in the 0th byte of the upper byte of the hold number command when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect based on the hold number command received from the main controller 110. The value of the bit (that is, the game state flag after continuous notice) is stored (see S1117 in FIG. 25). The value is held until the next start of the continuous notice effect is determined. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command, the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is “1”, and the main control device 110 holds the hold command. When it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect is set to the changed effect, the state flag 223d after the continuous notice is referred to (see S1106 in FIG. 25). Then, when the value of the state flag 223d after continuous notice is “1” (see S1106 in FIG. 25: Yes), the fluctuation effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the later game state is a “big hit” state, a variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of times of suspension included in the received number-of-holds command (holding ball) and the last variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set ( Whether or not there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between them (that is, whether or not the difference between the value of the holding number counter 223a and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is three or more) Is determined, and it is determined whether or not (Condition 2) is satisfied among the predetermined conditions described above (see S1108 in FIG. 25).

  On the other hand, when the value of the state flag 223d after continuous notification is “0” (see S1106 in FIG. 25: No), the variation effect after the continuous notification effect is performed in all the variation effects for which the continuous notification effect is set. Since the subsequent gaming state is a “disconnected” state, whether or not the gaming state after the continuous notice effect in which the permission is newly notified by the holding number command is “big hit” (that is, the upper rank of the holding number command) The 0th bit of the byte (whether or not the game state flag after the end of the continuous notice is 1) is determined, and it is determined whether or not (condition 3) is satisfied among the predetermined conditions described above (FIG. 25, S1109).

  The continuous notice mode flag 223e indicates an effect mode of the continuous notice effect when the continuous notice effect is set in the change effect (holding ball) for each variable effect (holding ball) held in the main control device 110. Flag to set. Here, the details of the continuous notice mode flag 223e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the continuous notice mode flag 223e.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the continuous notice mode flag 223e is configured as a 1-byte (8-bit) variable, and corresponds to each number of pending times for each bit from the 3rd bit to the 0th bit (lower 4 bits). Fluctuation effects (holding balls) are assigned respectively. Then, for each bit, an effect mode of continuous notice effect in the reserved ball assigned to the bit is set. Specifically, the 0th bit of the continuous notice mode flag 223e is assigned a variation effect (first reserved ball) with the number of holdings “1”, and a variation effect (first number) with the number of holdings “2” is assigned to the first bit. 2 reserved balls), the second bit is assigned a variation effect (third hold ball) with a hold count “3”, and the third bit is a change effect (fourth hold ball) with a hold number “4”. Is assigned. When “0” is set for each bit, it indicates that when a continuous notice effect is set in the changing effect (holding ball) corresponding to the bit, the normal mode is set as the effect mode. When “1” is set, when a continuous notice effect is set in the changing effect (holding ball) corresponding to the bit, it indicates that a special mode is set as the effect mode. Note that the seventh to fourth bits (upper 4 bits) of the continuous notice mode flag 223e are all set to “0” as unused areas.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the normal mode is a normal color (for example, blue) as the background color when displaying the chance eye as the stop pattern of the variable effect in the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. The special mode is to display a special color (for example, red) as the background color when displaying the chance eye as the stop pattern of the variation effect, but is not limited to this, and each mode (normally In the aspect and special aspect), different symbols may be displayed, or different sounds may be output. In a special mode, a special character may be displayed.

  The continuous notice mode flag 223e is set by the sound lamp control device 113 as follows. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the value of the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is “1”. If the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when (Condition 3) is satisfied among the predetermined conditions described above, the changing effect (holding ball) held at the main control device 110 at that time is determined. Among them, all the bits corresponding to the fluctuation effect (holding ball) for which the continuous notice effect is newly set this time are set to “1” (see S1119 to S1121 in FIG. 25). That is, the special mode is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) for which the new continuous notice effect is newly set this time.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “change effect (holding ball) for which a new continuous notice effect is set this time” refers to a change effect (holding ball) held in the main controller 110 when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined. ) Is a variation effect (holding ball) excluding a variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of a continuous notice effect has already been set in the past.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command, which is a command command for variation effect, from the main control device 110, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is a value other than 0 (that is, 1 or more), Since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation effect indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command in the continuous notice mode flag 223e, that is, the first reserved ball (the number of holding times) It is determined whether or not the bit corresponding to “1” (variable display) is “1”. Then, in the case of “1”, the third symbol display device 81 is set so that the continuous notice effect is executed in a special mode. Specifically, the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 9) for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode of the variation effect is set to “1” from the sound lamp control device 113. (See S1319 in FIG. 27). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the received display variation pattern command is set to “1”, the background color is displayed when the chance eye is displayed as the stop pattern of the variation effect. Is set to be a special color (see S1727 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is set to “0”, the background color is set to the normal color when the chance pattern is displayed as the stop pattern of the variation effect. (See S1728 in FIG. 31).

  The audio lamp control device 113 shifts the content of the continuous notice mode flag 223e to the right side (LSB side) by 1 bit each time a variation pattern command that is a command command for variation effect is received from the main control device 110. Then, 0 is inserted into the vacant seventh bit (see S1212 in FIG. 26). As a result, when the variation effect (variation display) is set and the holding ball is consumed, the effect modes of the continuous notice effect set for each of the second to fourth reservation balls are respectively first to first. The bit corresponding to the third holding ball (0th to 2nd bits) is set, and the bit corresponding to the fourth holding ball (third bit) is a value of “0” shifted from the fourth bit. (That is, “normal mode” is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect).

  In this way, the continuous notice mode flag 223e has the value of the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command being “1”, and among the above-described predetermined conditions (condition 3) ) Is satisfied, and the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, among the change effects (holding balls) that are held in the main control device 110 at that time, the change for which the continuous notice effect is newly set this time All the bits corresponding to the performance (holding ball) are set to “1” (see S1119 to S1121 in FIG. 25). Then, every time the variable display mode is set, the continuous notice mode flag 223e is shifted by 1 bit to the right while inserting 0 into the vacant bit. As a result, the setting of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is shifted by one bit to the right as the change effect (change effect) is set and the holding ball is consumed, so that the change pattern command is received. When setting the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, referring to the bit (0th bit) corresponding to the first reserved ball, the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (first reserved ball) corresponding to the change pattern command is referred to. The setting contents of the mode can be referred to accurately.

  In addition, one of the conditions for determining the start of the continuous notice effect with a predetermined probability (condition 3) is that execution of the continuous notice effect is set to at least a part of the already suspended variation effect. The condition is that the game state after the continuous notice effect is “disappearing”, and the game state after the continuous notice effect newly notified of permission by the hold count command is “hit”. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by satisfying (Condition 3) as in the present embodiment, the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the new continuous notice effect is newly set. Even if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “out” state as a result of the continuous notice effect set in the past by setting the effect mode as a special mode, it is newly set after that. Since the continuous notice effect is executed in a special mode, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation of being a “hit” by the special mode.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The effect mode counter 223f selects the variation effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 of the change effect excluding the last change effect among the change effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, from a plurality of effect mode candidates. This is a counter for determining one and is updated once every time the variation display process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (see S1201 in FIG. 26). The effect mode counter 223f is updated, for example, by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 3, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3).

  The sound lamp control device 113 checks the content of the change start flag that is turned on when a change pattern command that is a change effect instruction command is received from the main control device 110 during the change display process (see FIG. 26). If the change start flag is ON (see S1202 in FIG. 26), the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is further confirmed (see S1206 in FIG. 26). Then, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 2 or more, it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect is set to the change effect indicated by the change pattern command, and the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 27) is performed. Run.

  In the continuous notice setting process, the continuous notice effect is performed based on the variation pattern (variation time) in the variation effect instructed from the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command and the value of the effect mode counter 223f. The display pattern variation command to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the effect mode (from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is varied). 2 byte configuration command for instructing the production mode. In addition, the stop symbol of the variable effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is always set to be a chance of “3”, “4”, and “1”, and the contents are controlled by the display stop symbol command. The device 114 is notified (see S1317 in FIGS. 9 and 27).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 13, types of effect modes of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of effect modes of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the explanatory diagram of FIG. 9, “the variation pattern instructed by the main control device” indicating the variation pattern (variation time) instructed by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in the left two columns, The “effect mode counter” indicating the value of the mode counter 223f is described, and the “variation pattern instructed by the main control device” (variation time) and the “effect mode counter” are displayed in the three columns to the right of the “effect mode counter”. The contents of the variation effect mode set accordingly are described in three items of “first effect”, “second effect”, and “third effect”. In the rightmost column, “display variation pattern command” indicating the content of the display variation pattern command corresponding to each variation effect mode is described.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation (“normal reach variation”, “super reach variation”, In the case of “one of special reach fluctuations”), according to the value of the production mode counter 223f, the fluctuation production is distributed into a plurality of (up to 3 times) pseudo fluctuation productions. The pseudo variation effect is a plurality of variation effects performed in the 3rd symbol display for one reserved ball. As a mode of the pseudo variation effect distributed here, the length of the variation time is set. Accordingly, five types of out-of-range variation effects are prepared, so that the variation patterns instructed by the main controller 110 can be divided into a plurality of (up to three times) pseudo variation effects. Each of the pseudo variation effect modes is determined from the five types of outlier variations. In the explanatory diagram of FIG. 9, the mode of the pseudo variation effect of up to three times is described in three items of “first effect”, “second effect”, and “third effect”.

  That is, the item of “first effect” describes the effect mode of the change effect or the pseudo change effect that is performed immediately after receiving the change pattern command from the main control device 110, and the item of “second effect”. , An effect mode of the pseudo variation effect performed after the pseudo change effect is performed in the mode described in the “first effect” is described, and the item “third effect” includes “second effect”. The effect mode of the pseudo variation effect performed after the pseudo change effect is performed in the mode described in the above.

  In the explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 9, when the variation effect is not distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects (the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is “out-of-range variation” (variation time: 11 seconds)). If there is a case where the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0), the effect mode of the variable effect is described only in the item “first effect”. In addition, when the variation effect is divided into two pseudo variation effects, each of the items of “first effect” and “second effect” describes the effect mode of the two pseudo variation effects. When the variation effect is divided into three pseudo variation effects, each of the items “first effect”, “second effect” and “third effect” has the effect of three times of fluctuating effect. Each embodiment is described.

  Here, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect, the variation effect is simulated a plurality of times (up to three times). The reason for allocating to the variable production will be described. The reach variation effect stops the variation of the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 prior to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third symbol on the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 has five effective lines L1 to L5. This is an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to be aligned on at least one active line, and when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, three symbol rows Z1 to Z1 are displayed on at least one active line. This is the most basic effect that can give a player a sense of expectation that is a big hit with all the third symbols displayed in Z3. The player looks forward to the appearance of this reach variation effect and plays the game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is always set to be a chance of “3”, “4”, and “1”. As a result, the reach variation effect is not performed in the variation effect, and even if the third symbol is not aligned in the two left and right symbol sequences Z1 and Z3 stopped before the middle symbol sequence Z2, the variation effect is stopped. It is possible to give the player an enjoyment that occasional chances are displayed.

  As described above, there are the following problems when performing the continuous notice effect when the variable effect is stopped, such as displaying the chance chance when the variable effect is stopped. As described above, when it is determined whether or not the start of the continuous notice effect is permitted, when a winning to the first entrance 64 is detected, various counters acquired at that time (see FIG. 14) are determined. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the value, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held before the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. (Chance eye display) is set.

  Here, since the permission determination of the start of the continuous notice effect does not consider the effect mode of the change effect (whether it is the reach change effect) that has been suspended before the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected, There is a possibility that the effect mode of the change effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the reach change effect. However, since the reach variation effect is an effect characterized by the stopping method of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, a continuous notice effect is provided for a variation effect whose effect mode is a reach variation effect. Even if the execution is set, the chance symbol cannot be displayed as a stop symbol as it is. Therefore, if the effect mode of the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the reach variation effect, it is possible to give priority to the reach variation effect and not display the chance eye as the stop symbol. When the chances are displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a risk of interrupting the continuity that can be given to the player. On the other hand, in order to display the chance in the reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3” and the right symbol column Z3 is stopped at the symbol “1” during the time allotted to the reach variation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed after being stopped, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1, Z3 are not aligned. Will be given. Further, in the time allotted to the reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3”, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol “3”, and the reach symbol is displayed. Before the stop of the row Z2, if the sliding effect is performed by sliding the right symbol row Z3 again and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, it becomes a very extended production, so the player gets bored.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, a maximum of three pseudo variation effects. As the production mode of each pseudo variation production, it is determined from the five types of out-of-range variation production modes, so if the out-of-range variation mode is a stop symbol other than the jackpot symbol, the stop mode can be freely set Since it can be set, it can be easily set as a chance pattern as a stop pattern of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, even if any one of the variation patterns instructed by the main controller 110 is instructed, it is possible to surely perform the continuous notice effect, so that the player has a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. Can be made. In addition, by setting the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect as the deviating variation mode, the data of the deviating variation mode prepared for the normal variation effect can be used as it is. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare data for pseudo variation effects, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity necessary for distributing to a plurality of pseudo variation effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the pseudo variation effect is performed up to three times. In addition to distribution, immediately after the reach variation effect is performed, the effect is to perform a re-variation in which all the 3rd symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again so that the contents can be slid in such a manner that the contents can be visually recognized. It can be changed. Then, a chance eye is displayed as a stoppage symbol of re-variation. Thereby, even if the effect mode of the change effect instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach change mode, the continuous notice effect can be easily executed. In addition, even if the continuous notice effect is executed, the change effect can be performed in the reach change mode, so that the player can be satisfied by performing the change effect in the reach change mode that the player is looking forward to. it can.

  In addition, since re-change is performed after the reach-reach symbol is displayed according to the reach variation mode, even if the jackpot symbol is not displayed according to the reach variation mode, the player has a sense of expectation that some kind of effect will be performed. be able to. Then, by displaying the chance chance as the re-variation stop symbol, the continuous notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that becomes a big hit after the subsequent variation effect.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 9, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is out of the variation mode (variation time: 11 seconds), the production mode Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, as the variation effect mode, one “out-of-range variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is set as instructed by the main controller 110. Then, “AA01H” or “AB01H” is set as the display variation pattern command in this case, and is transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, chances of “3”, “4”, and “1” are set as the stop symbols of the variation effect, and this content is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop symbol command. As a result, under the control of the display control device 114, a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in a deviation variation mode with a variation time of 11 seconds, and a chance symbol is displayed as the stop symbol.

  In the display variation pattern command, when the upper byte is “AAH”, the display control device 114 is notified that it is the normal mode as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, and the upper byte is “ABH”. ", It is notified that it is a special mode as an effect mode of a continuous notice effect. Here, in the present embodiment, among the effect modes of the continuous notice effect, as described above, the normal method is a normal color (for example, blue) as the background color when displaying the chance eye as the stop pattern of the variable effect, as described above. The special mode is to display a special color (for example, red) as the background color when the chance eye is displayed as the stop pattern of the variation effect.

  The setting of the display variation pattern command is performed in a continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 27) executed by the sound lamp control device 113. In this process, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is temporarily set to “AAH” to generate a command (see S1302, S1305, etc. in FIG. 27). If the bit (0th bit) corresponding to the first reserved ball of the continuous notice mode flag 223e is “1”, the higher order is obtained by adding “0100H” to the display variation pattern command once set. The byte is changed to “ABH” (see S1319 in FIG. 27).

  In this embodiment, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is once set to “AAH”, and then the upper byte is changed to “ABH” according to the content of the continuous notice mode flag 223e. First, referring to the bit (0th bit) corresponding to the first reserved ball of the continuous notice mode flag 223e, if the value is “0”, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is set to “AAH”. If it is “1”, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command may be set to “ABH”.

  On the other hand, if the upper byte of the received command is “AAH” or “ABH”, the display control device 114 recognizes that the command is a display variation pattern command (see S1403 in FIG. 28). If the 0th bit of the upper byte of the command is “0”, control is performed so that the background color becomes the normal color when the chance pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the stop symbol of the variation effect. (See S1728 in FIG. 31) On the other hand, when the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is “1”, the chance symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the variation effect stop symbol. The background color is controlled to be a special color (see S1727 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the continuous notice mode flag 223e indicates that the value of the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command or the continuous notice command is “1”, and among the predetermined conditions described above When (Condition 3) is satisfied, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, among the variable effects (holding balls) held in the main control device 110 at that time, a new continuous notice effect is set this time. All the bits corresponding to the changed effect (holding ball) are set to “1” (see S1119 to S1121 in FIG. 25). (Condition 3) is that, as described above, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set to at least a part of the already suspended variation effect, and the game state after the continuous notice effect is “out” In addition, the game condition after the continuous notice effect for which permission has been newly notified by the hold count command or the continuous notice command is “big hit”. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by satisfying (Condition 3) as in the present embodiment, the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the new continuous notice effect is newly set. Even if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “out” state as a result of the continuous notice effect set in the past by setting the effect mode as a special mode, it is newly set after that. Since the continuous notice effect is executed in a special mode, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation of being a “hit” by the special mode.

  Also, since the effect mode of the continuous notice effect can be set by the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command which is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect effect of the change effect, the effect of the continuous notice effect can be set. There is no need to separately prepare a command for notifying the mode individually, and it is possible to set the effect mode of the change effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect with one command. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands notified from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and it is possible to suppress each processing load from increasing.

  Next, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds) in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the main control device 110 has instructed. Instead of setting the normal reach fluctuation mode as it is, the production mode of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set as follows according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. That is, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “0”, the “2 seconds shortened normal reach change + 2 second re-change” mode (change time: 25 seconds) is set as the display mode of the change effect and displayed. “AA81H” (or “AB81H”) is set as the change pattern command for use. Details of the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “1” to “3”, the change effect is distributed into two pseudo change effects. When the value of the production mode counter 223f is “1” as the production mode of each pseudo variation production, the first production is the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and the second production is “ “Outside fluctuation + slip effect” mode (fluctuation time: 14 seconds) is set, and “AA41H” (or “AB41H”) is set as the display fluctuation pattern command. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “2”, the first effect is the “outside change + slip effect” mode (variation time: 14 seconds), and the second effect is the “outside change” mode (variation time: 11 seconds). “AA42H” (or “AB42H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. Further, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “3”, the first effect is an “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extended” mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds), and the second effect is “outside change + 1.5”. “Second extension” mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds) is set, and “AA43H” (or “AB43H”) is set as the display variation pattern command.

  In addition, as an effect mode of the change effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the stop effect of the change effect corresponding to the display change pattern command set according to FIG. 9 is “3”, “4”, “ Is set to the chance of “1”, and the display control device 114 is notified of the contents by a display stop symbol command. Here, even when one variation effect is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the stop symbol of each pseudo variation effect is set by this display stop symbol command. And in this embodiment, even when it distributes to the pseudo | simulation variation effect of multiple times, the variation symbol command for a display is transmitted once with respect to one variation effect (holding ball). Then, the display control device 114 performs control so that the stop symbol set by the display stop symbol command is displayed in all the pseudo variation effects distributed in the one variation effect (holding ball). As a result, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, a plurality of times of pseudo assignments distributed when the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds). Any stop symbol of the variation effect is displayed as an opportunity.

  Therefore, even if one variation effect is assigned to multiple pseudo variation effects, it allows the player to treat the pseudo variation effect as if it were a normal variation effect, and the chances are continuous as a stop pattern. Can be recognized as being displayed. In addition, since it is only necessary to send a display stop symbol command once to one variation effect (holding ball), it is necessary to set and transmit a display stop symbol command for each of a plurality of pseudo variation effects. Therefore, an increase in processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be suppressed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, in the variation effect set to execute the continuous notice effect, the change is instructed when the variation pattern instructed by main controller 110 is the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds). The effect mode of the pseudo variation effect will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart of a normal normal reach variation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the normal reach variation mode, and FIG. 10A is a timing chart of a normal normal reach variation mode. 10 (b) is a timing chart of a pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA41H” (or “AB41H”), and FIG. In FIG. 10D, the variation pattern command for display is indicated by “AA43H” (or “AB43H”). It is a timing chart of the production | presentation aspect of a pseudo | simulation fluctuation production.

  First, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), the normal normal reach fluctuation mode (fluctuation time: 25 seconds) is shown in FIG. High-speed fluctuation of each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) is started. Then, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped nine seconds after the start of the variation effect, and further, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped one second later (10 seconds after the start of the variation effect). At this time, in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, a reach in which the same symbols are aligned on at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) according to the stop symbol command from the main controller 110. A symbol is displayed. Thereafter (for example, 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 stops, that is, 13 seconds after the start of the changing effect), the change in the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the high-speed fluctuation state to the low-speed fluctuation state. Then, an effect is shown to show whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, 25 seconds after the start of the changing effect, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped according to the stop command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the stop symbol according to the stop symbol command from the main controller 110 is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10B, the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA41H” (or “AB41H”) is first a variation effect. As the first effect, the first pseudo change effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside change” mode (change time: 11 seconds) as the first effect. The second pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “slip effect” mode (variation time: 14 seconds).

  Among these, the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation) that is set when the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is instructed from the main controller 110. Time: 11 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 10 (b), a pseudo variation effect is started in the third symbol display device, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 of left, middle, and right , Z3 (see FIG. 4), the left symbol row Z1 is stopped 9 seconds after the start of each high-speed fluctuation. At this time, since the stop symbol is set as the chance symbol, the symbol “3” is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. Next, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped 10 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation, and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2. Then, 11 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the symbol “4” is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is performed in the “out-of-range variation” mode with a variation time of 11 seconds, and the chance pattern is displayed as the stop symbol.

  When the first pseudo variation effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 10B, the second pseudo variation effect is performed immediately after in the “out-of-range variation + slip effect” mode (variation time: 14 seconds). Is called. In this “out-of-shift variation + slip effect” mode (variation time: 14 seconds), a pseudo variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (left, middle and right) ( When each high-speed fluctuation is started, the left symbol sequence Z1 stops 9 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (20 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started), as in the “out-of-range fluctuation” mode. The symbol “3” is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. Then, 10 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (21 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped for a moment, and then the symbol displayed in the right symbol row Z3 is slid again. The slip production will start for 3 seconds. Then, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped 13 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation (24 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started), and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2.

  Due to this slip effect, since the right symbol row Z3 stops for a moment and then starts to change again, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special symbol is displayed in the right symbol row Z3. Also, when the chance symbol “3” is displayed in the left symbol column Z1 on the middle line L2, the slip effect is performed, and the chance symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol column Z3 on the middle line L2. When displayed, it is possible to further increase the expectation that the chance is displayed as the final stop symbol for the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that does not make the player bored. In addition, since a slip effect of 3 seconds is added to the “outward fluctuation” mode, an adjustment is made such that the fluctuation time of the “outside fluctuation + slip effect” mode is about 3 seconds longer than the “outward fluctuation” mode. be able to.

  After the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped 14 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation (25 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started), and the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2 includes The symbol “4” is displayed. As a result, the second pseudo variation effect is performed in the “out-of-shift variation + slip effect” mode with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the chance pattern is displayed as the stop symbol.

  Here, the effect mode of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is determined based on a lottery performed by the main control device 110 at the time of starting winning before the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, when the effect mode of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode, the stop symbol becomes the reach symbol, and the continuous notice effect that is performed by displaying the chance eye is executed as it is. I can't. Therefore, in order to display the chances in the normal reach fluctuation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3” and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol “1” in the time allotted to the normal reach fluctuation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed after being stopped, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1, Z3 are not aligned. Will be given. Further, in the time allotted to the normal reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3”, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol “3”, and the reach symbol is displayed, and then the middle symbol is displayed. Before the stop of the row Z2, if the sliding effect is performed in which the right symbol row Z3 is slid and displayed again and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, it becomes a very extended production, so the player gets bored. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the normal reach fluctuation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects, and the chances are displayed as stop patterns of the pseudo fluctuation effects. Therefore, the fluctuation determined by the main controller 110 Even if the effect mode of the effect is a normal reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous notice effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. .

  Further, in the variation effect set to execute the continuous notice effect, if the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a normal reach variation mode with a long variation time (variation time: 25 seconds), the variation time Among them, it is divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects. In each pseudo variation effect, the chance symbol (the symbols on the middle line L2 are “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left) is displayed as the stop symbol, so the chance symbol is displayed at a short time interval. Can be displayed. Therefore, even if a normal reach variation mode having a long variation time is instructed by the main control device 110 as a variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the player is notified that the chances are continuously displayed. It can be easily noticed, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step each time the chance is displayed.

  Further, as an effect mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect, not only the “outside fluctuation” mode in which the fluctuation time is 11 seconds, but also the “outside fluctuation +” in which the fluctuation time is 3 seconds longer than the “outside fluctuation” mode. "Slip production" mode is prepared, and by combining these production modes, the normal reach variation mode, without changing the variation time in the variation time (25 seconds) assigned to the normal reach variation mode, This can be divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 (c), the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA42H” (or “AB42H”) is a variation effect command. With the start, the first pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “out-of-shift variation + slip effect” mode (variation time: 14 seconds) as the first effect, and then “out” as the second effect. A second pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds).

  That is, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in this case is that the variation time is compared with the case where the display variation pattern command is “AA41H” (or “AB41H”) (see FIG. 10B). The order of the pseudo variation effect performed in the “outward variation” mode of 11 seconds and the pseudo variation effect performed in the “outage variation + slip effect” mode of variation time of 14 seconds are switched, As shown in FIG. 10C, the “out-of-range variation” mode when the display variation pattern command is “AA42H” (or “AB42H”) is the display variation pattern command is “AA41H” (or “AB41H”). )), A pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the “outside variation” mode. Further, the “out-of-range variation + slip effect” mode when the display variation pattern command is “AA42H” (or “AB42H”) is the case where the display variation pattern command is “AA41H” (or “AB41H”). A pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the “outside variation + slip effect” mode.

  As a result, the display variation pattern command is also indicated by “AA41H” (or “AB41H”) in the pseudo variation effect presentation mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA42H” (or “AB42H”). In the same way as the production mode of the pseudo variation effect, the normal reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation productions, and the chance item is displayed as a stop pattern of the pseudo variation production. Even when the determined effect mode of the variation effect is the normal reach variation mode, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be easily set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if a normal reach variation mode having a long variation time is instructed by the main control device 110 as a variation pattern of the variation representation in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, the player can see that the chances are continuously displayed. It can be easily noticed, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step each time the chance is displayed. Further, the normal reach variation mode can be distributed to two pseudo variation effects without leaving the variation time in the variation time (25 seconds) assigned to the normal reach variation mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 (d), the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA43H” (or “AB43H”) At the start, the first pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation + 1.5 second extension” mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds) as the first effect. Subsequently, as the second effect, the second pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the same “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds) as the first effect. Is called. That is, in this case, the pseudo variation effect of the “outside variation + 1.5 second extension” mode is repeated twice.

  In the “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode (fluctuation time: 12.5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 10 (d), a pseudo fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and left / middle When the high-speed fluctuation of each of the right three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (see FIG. 4) is started, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are longer by 1.5 seconds than in the “out-of-shift” mode. High speed fluctuations are made. Then, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped 10.5 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, and the symbol “3” of the chance is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. After that, after 11.5 seconds from the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the right symbol row Z2 is stopped, and after the symbol “1” of the chance is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2, 12. The middle symbol row Z2 is stopped after 5 seconds, and the symbol “4” of the chance is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2.

  As a result, the first and second pseudo fluctuation effects are performed in the “outside fluctuation + 1.5 seconds” mode with a fluctuation time of 12.5 seconds, respectively, and chance chances are displayed as stop symbols, respectively. In this way, since the normal reach variation mode is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chance pattern is displayed as a stop pattern of the pseudo variation effect, the display variation pattern command is “AA41H” (or “AB41H”). )), It is possible to easily execute the continuous notice effect even if the effect mode of the change effect determined by the main controller 110 is the normal reach change mode. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. In addition, since chances are continuously displayed at short time intervals, even if a normal reach variation mode having a long variation time is instructed by the main control device 110 as a variation pattern of the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Thus, the player can easily notice that the chances are displayed continuously, and the player's expectation can be increased step by step each time the chances are displayed.

  In addition, by extending the time required for the high-speed fluctuation, the time required for the pseudo fluctuation effect is adjusted, so that the normal reach fluctuation mode is set within the fluctuation time (25 seconds) assigned to the normal reach fluctuation mode. Without leaving the fluctuation time, it can be divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects. Then, for example, in the display control device 113, an image prepared for the “out-of-shift” mode is used, and the image related to the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is extended for 1.5 seconds in this case. ) If the display is controlled so that it is repeatedly displayed, the image that is subject to high-speed fluctuation is displayed in a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the symbol. Can be prevented from being recognized by the player. In addition, it is not necessary to prepare an image for the “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode separately from the image for the “outside fluctuation” mode, so the storage capacity for storing the image for the fluctuation effect increases. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In the variation effect set to execute the continuous notice effect, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds), the main control device is similar to the normal reach variation mode. Instead of setting the super reach variation mode instructed by 110 as it is, the production mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set as follows according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. That is, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “0”, the mode of change effect is set to one “2 second shortened super reach change + 2 second re-change” mode (change time: 40 seconds), “AA82H” (or “AB82H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. Details of the “2 second shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “1” to “3”, the change effect is distributed into two pseudo change effects. When the value of the production mode counter 223f is “1” as the production mode of each pseudo variation production, the first production is “outside fluctuation + 1 second extension” mode (variation time: 12 seconds), second The effect is set to be in the “outside change with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and “AA51H” (or “AB51H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. In addition, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “2” or “3”, the first effect is “outside variation with a notice effect” (variation time: 28 seconds), and the second effect is “outside change + 1 second extension” (Variation time: 12 seconds), and “AA52H” (or “AB52H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. In addition, as described above, when the change pattern command for display “AA82H”, “AB82H”, “AA51H”, “AB51H”, “AA52H”, “AB52H” is set, Are also set to chances “3”, “4”, and “1”, and the contents are notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop symbol command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, in the variation effect set to execute the continuous notice effect, the distribution is instructed when the variation pattern instructed by main controller 110 is the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds). A description will be given of the effect of the pseudo variation effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of a normal super reach variation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the super reach variation mode. FIG. 11A shows the timing of the normal super reach variation mode. The chart, FIG. 11B, is a timing chart of the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the variation pattern command for display is indicated by “AA51H” (or “AB51H”), and FIG. 11C is the variation for display. It is a timing chart of the production mode of the pseudo variation effect whose pattern command is indicated by “AA52H” (or “AB52H”).

  First, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the normal super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds) is started in the same manner as the normal normal reach variation mode (see FIG. 10 (a)). In the third symbol display device 81, when the high-speed fluctuation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (see FIG. 4) of the left, middle, and right is started, the left symbol row Z1 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect. Is stopped, and further, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped 1 second later (10 seconds after the start of the changing effect). At this time, reach symbols are displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2 in accordance with the stop symbol command from the main controller 110. Thereafter (for example, 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 stops, that is, 13 seconds after the start of the changing effect), the change in the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the high-speed fluctuation state to the low-speed fluctuation state. Then, after an effect that shows whether or not the jackpot symbol is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, in accordance with a stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 after 40 seconds from the start of the variable effect, The symbol row Z2 is stopped, and a stop symbol according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110 is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11 (b), the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA51H” (or “AB51H”) is first a variation effect. As the first effect, the first pseudo change effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “outward change + 1 second extension” mode (change time: 12 seconds) as the first effect. In the third symbol display device 81, the second pseudo variation effect is performed in the “displacement variation with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds).

  Among these, the “outside fluctuation + 1 second extension” mode (variation time: 12 seconds) is substantially the same production mode as the “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds). However, as shown in FIG. 11B, a pseudo variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (see FIG. 4) of left, middle, and right When the high-speed fluctuation is started, in the case of the “out-of-line fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode, the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is performed 1.5 seconds longer than the “out-of-line variation” mode. On the other hand, in the case of the “outward fluctuation + 1 second extension” mode, the high-speed fluctuations of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are performed for one second longer than in the “outside fluctuation” mode. Then, 10 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the chance symbol “3” is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. After that, 11 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation, the right symbol row Z2 is stopped, and after the symbol “1” of the chance is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2, the middle is 12 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation. The symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the symbol “4” of the chance is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2.

  As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is performed in an “out-of-shift variation + 1 second extension” mode with a variation time of 12 seconds, and the chance pattern is displayed as the stop symbol. Also, in the case of the “outward fluctuation + 1 second extension” mode, similarly to the “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode, the display control device 113 uses the image prepared for the “outside fluctuation” mode, If control is performed so that images related to high-speed fluctuations in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are repeatedly displayed for an extended time (in this case, 1 second), the images related to high-speed fluctuations are Since it is displayed in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the symbols caused by repeating the image. In addition, by using an image prepared for the “out-of-range variation” mode, by controlling so that the images related to the high-speed variation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are repeatedly displayed for the extended time, The extension time can be set not only to 1 second or 1.5 seconds, but also to an arbitrary time. Furthermore, if one image for the “outside variation” mode is prepared, the variation effect can be performed in the “outside variation + 1 second extension” mode or the “outside variation +1.5 second extension” mode, so the image for the variation presentation is stored. An increase in storage capacity for doing so can be suppressed.

  When the first pseudo variation effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 11B, the second pseudo variation effect is performed immediately afterward in the “outside variation with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds). Is called. This “out-of-track change with a notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds) is one of the effect modes used for a normal change effect in which a continuous notice effect is not added together with the “reach fluctuation with a notice effect” mode. Yes, the pseudo variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and when the high-speed variation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) of the left, middle and right is started, the high-speed variation is started. Two seconds after the start of change (14 seconds after the start of change production), the high-speed change display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves from the main display area Dm to the sub display area Ds. If one of the scenes or a promotional video of music is displayed, and the reach symbol is displayed after the display is finished, a notice effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of transition to a big hit is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 22 seconds). Be called

  Next, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the notice effect is terminated, and the high-speed fluctuation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed again in the main display area Dm. After the second), the left symbol row Z1 is stopped, the symbol “3” is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2, and 27 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation (after the fluctuation effect is started) 39 seconds later), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped 28 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation (40 seconds after the fluctuation effect circuit), and the symbol “4” is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2. As a result, the second pseudo variation effect is performed in a “displacement variation with a notice effect” with a variation time of 28 seconds, and the chance pattern is displayed as the stop symbol.

  In this way, the super reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chances are displayed as a stop pattern of the pseudo variation effect, so the variation effect effect mode determined by the main control device 110 is displayed. Even if it is a case where it is a super reach fluctuation aspect, execution of a continuous notice effect can be set easily. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. Also, in the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds) having a longer variation time than the normal reach variation mode, as in the normal reach variation mode, two pseudo variation effects are produced in the variation time. It is distributed to. In each pseudo variation effect, since the chance pattern (the symbols on the middle line L2 are “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left) is displayed as the stop symbol, the continuous notice effect is executed. Even if the super reach variation mode is instructed from the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the set variation effect, the player can easily notice that the chances are displayed continuously. Each time is displayed, the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step.

  In addition, as the effect mode of the second pseudo variation effect, the “outside variation with the notification effect” mode is set, and the notification effect is performed during the high-speed variation. It is possible to lengthen the time required for various fluctuation effects. In other words, when distributing a variation pattern having a long variation time such as a super reach variation mode to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the time required for at least one pseudo variation effect is set to be long. Therefore, while reducing the number of pseudo variation effects, the super reach variation mode can be set within the variation time (40 seconds) assigned to the super reach variation mode without leaving the variation time. It can be divided into a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects. Therefore, based on the lottery performed when the start condition is satisfied once, usually, the variation effect is performed once, and the pseudo variation effect is frequently performed by the distribution of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, if the notice effect is used in the “variation fluctuation with notice effect” mode or the “reach fluctuation with notice effect” mode performed in the normal fluctuation effect where the continuous notice effect is not added, By using data for a notice effect that is performed in a normal variation effect, it is possible to make a continuous notice in a pseudo change effect. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare data for the notice effect that is performed during the pseudo variation effect, so the storage capacity for storing the data for the notice effect that is performed during the pseudo change effect is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11 (c), the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA52H” (or “AB52H”) At the same time, the first pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “outward variation with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds) as the first effect. The second pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “variation + 1 second extension” mode (variation time: 12 seconds).

  That is, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in this case is that the variation time is compared with the case where the display variation pattern command is “AA51H” (or “AB51H”) (see FIG. 11B). The order of the pseudo fluctuation effect performed in the "outward fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode of 12 seconds and the pseudo fluctuation effect performed in the "outside fluctuation with warning effect" mode of 28 seconds are switched. As shown in FIG. 11 (c), the “variation variation with a notice effect” mode when the variation pattern command for display is “AA52H” (or “AB52H”) has the variation pattern command for display “AA51H”. ”(Or“ AB51H ”), the pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the“ displacement variation with notice effect ”mode. Further, the “outside change + 1 second extension” mode when the display variation pattern command is “AA52H” (or “AB52H”) is the case where the display variation pattern command is “AA51H” (or “AB51H”). A pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the “outside variation + 1 second extension” mode.

  As a result, the display variation pattern command is also indicated by “AA51H” (or “AB51H”) in the pseudo variation effect presentation mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA52H” (or “AB52H”). In the same manner as the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect, the super reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo effect variations, and the chances are displayed as a stop pattern of the pseudo effect variation. Even if the effect mode of the change effect determined by the above is the super reach change mode, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be easily set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. Moreover, even if the super reach variation mode is instructed from the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the player can easily notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed. Each time the chance is displayed, the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, even when the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is the special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds), the same as the normal reach variation mode and the super reach variation mode. In addition, the special reach variation mode instructed by the main controller 110 is not set as it is, but the variation effect production mode in the third symbol display device 81 is set as follows according to the value of the production mode counter 223f. To do. That is, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “0”, the mode of change effect is set to one “2 second shortened special reach change + 2 second re-change” mode (change time: 50 seconds), “AA83H” (or “AB83H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. Details of the “2 second shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “1” to “3”, the change effect is distributed to three pseudo change effects. When the value of the production mode counter 223f is “1” as the production mode of each pseudo variation production, the first production is the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) and the second production is “ “Outside variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds), the third effect is set to be a “outside variation with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and the display variation pattern command is “AA61H” (or “AB61H”) is set. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “2”, the first effect is the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and the second effect is the “outside change with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds). The third effect is set to be “outside fluctuation” (fluctuation time: 11 seconds), and “AA62H” (or “AB62H”) is set as the display fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “3”, the first effect is a “displacement change with a notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and the second effect is a “out change” mode (change time: 11). Second), the third effect is set to be “outside fluctuation” (fluctuation time: 11 seconds), and “AA63H” (or “AB63H”) is set as the display fluctuation pattern command. In addition, as described above, the stop pattern of the change effect when “AA83H”, “AB83H”, “AA61H” to “AA63H”, “AB61H” to “AB63H” is set as the display change pattern command, as described above. Are also set to chances “3”, “4”, and “1”, and the contents are notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop symbol command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, distribution is performed when the variation pattern instructed by main controller 110 is the special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds). A description will be given of the effect of the pseudo variation effect. FIG. 12 is a timing chart of a normal special reach variation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the special reach variation mode. FIG. 12A shows the timing of a normal special reach variation mode. The chart, FIG. 12B, is a timing chart of an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect whose display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA61H” (or “AB61H”), and FIG. 12C is a display variation. FIG. 12D shows a timing chart of a pseudo variation effect production mode in which the pattern command is “AA62H” (or “AB62H”), and FIG. 12D shows that the display variation pattern command is “AA63H” (or “AB63H”). It is a timing chart of the production | generation aspect of the pseudo fluctuation production shown by ().

  First, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the normal special reach fluctuation mode (fluctuation time: 50 seconds) includes the normal normal reach fluctuation mode (see FIG. 10 (a)) and the super reach fluctuation mode (FIG. 11 (a)). As in ()), the variation effect is started, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the high-speed variation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (see FIG. 4) of left, middle, and right. The left symbol row Z1 is stopped 9 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and further, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped one second later (10 seconds after the start of the variation effect). At this time, reach symbols are displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2 in accordance with the stop symbol command from the main controller 110. Thereafter (for example, 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 stops, that is, 13 seconds after the start of the changing effect), the change in the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the high-speed fluctuation state to the low-speed fluctuation state. Then, after an effect that shows whether or not the jackpot symbol is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, in accordance with a stop command transmitted from the main controller 110 after 50 seconds from the start of the variable effect, The symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the stop symbol according to the stop symbol command from the main controller 110 is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 12B, the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA61H” (or “AB61H”) is first a variation effect. As the first effect, the first pseudo effect of variation is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) as the first effect, and after the end of the first effect, As the second effect, the second pseudo change effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “out-of-range change” mode (variation time: 11 seconds). A third pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “offset variation with a notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds).

  Among these, the “outside variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is performed as a first pseudo variation effect when the display variation pattern command is “AA41H” (or “AB41H”), for example. This is the same production mode as the “out-of-range variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and a pseudo variation production is performed at the same timing. In addition, the “off-change with a notice effect” mode (change time: 28 seconds) is performed as the second pseudo change effect when the display change pattern command is “AA51H” (or “AB51H”), for example. This is the same effect mode as the “out-of-track change with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and a pseudo-change effect is performed at the same timing.

  As a result, in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 has a special reach variation mode (variation time) having a longer variation time than the normal reach variation mode or the super reach variation mode. : 50 seconds), it is divided into three pseudo variation effects within the variation time. In each pseudo variation effect, since the chance pattern (the symbols on the middle line L2 are “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left) is displayed as the stop symbol, the continuous notice effect is executed. Even if a special reach variation mode is instructed from the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the set variation effect, the player can easily notice that the chances are displayed continuously. Each time is displayed, the player's expectation can be increased step by step.

  In addition, as the mode of the third pseudo variation effect, the “out-of-track variation with the notification effect” mode is set, and the notification effect is performed during the high-speed variation. It is possible to lengthen the time required for various fluctuation effects. Therefore, as in the case of the super reach variation mode, the special reach variation mode is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chances are displayed as stop patterns of the pseudo variation effects. Even if the determined effect mode of the variation effect is the special reach variation mode, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be easily set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. In addition, when a variation pattern having a long variation time such as a special reach variation mode is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the time required for at least one pseudo variation effect can be set to be long. Therefore, while reducing the number of pseudo fluctuation effects, the special reach fluctuation mode can be changed more than once within the fluctuation time (50 seconds) assigned to the special reach fluctuation mode. Can be divided into pseudo-variable effects. Therefore, based on the lottery performed when the start condition is satisfied once, usually, the variation effect is performed once, and the pseudo variation effect is frequently performed by the distribution of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 12C, the pseudo variation effect production mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA62H” (or “AB62H”) At the start, the first pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds) as the first effect, and after the first effect ends, As the second effect, the second pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation with a notice effect” (variation time: 28 seconds), and after the second effect is finished, the third effect is further performed. As a result, a third pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 13C, the pseudo variation effect presentation mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA63H” (or “AB63H”) is the start of the variation effect. At the same time, the first pseudo variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation with notice effect” mode (variation time: 28 seconds) as the first effect, and after the end of the first effect, As the second effect, the second pseudo change effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and after the second effect is finished, the third effect is further provided. In the “outside fluctuation” mode (fluctuation time: 11 seconds), the third pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in these cases is the variation time as compared with the case where the display variation pattern command is “AA61H” (or “AB61H”) (see FIG. 12B). The order of two pseudo fluctuation effects performed in the “outward fluctuation” mode of 11 seconds and the pseudo fluctuation effects performed in the “outside fluctuation with warning effect” mode of 28 seconds have been switched. 12 (c) or (d), when the display variation pattern command is “AA62H” (or “AB62H”) and “AA63H” (or “AB63H”) In the “outward fluctuation with a notice effect” mode, a pseudo fluctuation effect is performed at the same timing as the “outside change with a notice effect” mode when the display variation pattern command is “AA61H” (or “AB61H”). It is. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is “AA62H” (or “AB62H”) and “AA63H” (or “AB63H”), the display variation pattern command is “AA61H”. (Or “AB61H”), the pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the “outside variation” mode.

  As a result, the display variation pattern command is “AA62H” (or “AB62H”) and “AA63H” (or “AB63H”). Similar to the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect indicated by “AA61H” (or “AB61H”), the special reach change mode is assigned to a plurality of times of the pseudo effect change, and as a stop pattern of the pseudo change effect. Since the chances are displayed, even if the effect mode of the change effect determined by the main control device 110 is the special reach change mode, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be easily set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. Moreover, even if the special reach variation mode is instructed from the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the player can easily notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed. Each time the chance is displayed, the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13, a “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (variation time: 25 seconds), a “2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (variation time: 40 seconds), Details of the “2 second shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode (variation time: 50 seconds) will be described. FIG. 13A is a timing chart of the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second revariation” mode performed by the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 13B shows “2 second shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 seconds”. FIG. 13C is a timing chart of the “2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode. FIGS. 13A to 13C show a normal normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds), a super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds), and a special reach variation mode (variation time: 50), respectively. (Second) timing chart is also shown. Note that the timings of these normal normal reach fluctuation modes, super reach fluctuation modes, and special reach fluctuation modes are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a), 11 (a), and 12 (a), respectively. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode (variation time: 25 seconds), as described above, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the variation pattern in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. A variation effect effect mode in the third symbol display device 81, which is set when the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds) and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “0”. This is an effect mode corresponding to the pattern command “AA81H” (or “AB81H”). That is, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command “AA81H” (or “AB81H”), the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2”. Variation effect is performed in the “second variation” mode.

  In the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode (variation time: 25 seconds), as shown in FIG.・ High-speed fluctuation of each of the right three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) is started. In the normal normal reach variation, the left symbol row Z1 is subjected to the high-speed variation for 9 seconds. In the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode, the time is shortened by 1 second, and the variation effect is started. 8 seconds later, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped. Then, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped 1 second later (9 seconds after the start of the variation effect). At this time, in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, a reach in which the same symbols are aligned on at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) according to the stop symbol command from the main controller 110. A symbol is displayed.

  Next, in normal normal reach fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 shifts from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation three seconds after the right symbol row Z3 stops (that is, 13 seconds after the start of the changing effect). In the “second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode, the time is further shortened by 1 second, and after 2 seconds (that is, 11 seconds after the start of the variation effect), the middle symbol row Z2 The low speed fluctuation starts. After that, the effect that shows whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned on any of the active lines L1 to L5 is performed for 12 seconds, which is the same as the normal normal reach variation, and is 23 seconds after the start of the variation effect. The symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the detach reach symbol is temporarily displayed. That is, the reach variation effect is performed in which the variation time is shortened by 2 seconds from the normal normal reach variation mode from when the variation effect is started until the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  Immediately after that, the second change that the symbol displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts to fluctuate again so that the contents can slide in a visually recognizable manner is caused by shortening the normal reach fluctuation manner. Between. In this way, by performing re-variation after the normal reach variation mode has been performed, the player can be more aware of the chances that the chances are displayed while recognizing the contents of all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. You can have it. Note that the re-variation may start again so that only some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 slide in such a manner that the contents thereof can be visually recognized.

  Further, in this case, re-variation is performed in a state where the background symbols and other display symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are maintained when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. Thus, by displaying the re-variation, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that some effect will be performed following the reach variation effect.

  Then, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation, according to the stop command transmitted from the main controller 110, all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are stopped, and the stop symbols ("3" "4" "1" in order from the left) Is displayed on the middle line L2.

  As described above, in the normal reach variation mode, the period during which the high-speed variation is performed is shortened, and re-variation is performed in the shortened time, and the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol. In the time allotted to the normal reach fluctuation mode, the continuous notice effect can be surely performed. In addition, when the time required for the normal reach variation mode is reduced by removing the image from the image prepared for the normal reach variation mode and displaying the image, high-speed variations that are difficult for the player to visually recognize during the time period for which the time is shortened. Since it is the displayed period, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the variation effect caused by removing the image.

  In addition, the effect mode of the variable effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is determined based on a lottery performed at the time of starting winning by the main controller 110 before the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. When the effect mode of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode, the stop symbol becomes the reach symbol, and the continuous notice effect performed by displaying the chance eye is executed as it is. I can't. Therefore, in order to display the chances in the normal reach fluctuation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3” and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol “1” in the time allotted to the normal reach fluctuation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed after being stopped, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1, Z3 are not aligned. Will be given. Further, in the time allotted to the normal reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3”, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol “3”, and the reach symbol is displayed, and then the middle symbol is displayed. Before the stop of the row Z2, if the sliding effect is performed in which the right symbol row Z3 is slid and displayed again and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, it becomes a very extended production, so the player gets bored.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal reach variation mode, re-variation is performed, and the chance symbol is displayed as the stop symbol, so that the effect of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is displayed. Even if the mode is the normal reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the change effect can be performed in the normal reach change mode, so that the player is satisfied by performing the change effect in the reach change mode that the player is looking forward to. be able to.

  In addition, since the re-change is performed after the outreach symbol is displayed according to the normal reach variation mode, even if the jackpot symbol is not displayed according to the normal reach variation mode, the player has a sense of expectation that some effect will be performed. be able to. Then, by displaying the chance chance as the re-variation stop symbol, the continuous notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that becomes a big hit after the subsequent variation effect.

  As described above, the “2 second shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode (variation time: 40 seconds) is the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 in the fluctuation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Is a variation mode effect mode in the third symbol display device 81, which is set when the value is the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds) and the value of the performance mode counter 223f is “0”. This is an effect mode corresponding to the use variation pattern command “AA82H” (or “AB82H”). That is, when the display variation pattern command “AA82H” (or “AB82H”) is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to “2 second shortened super reach variation”. Variation effect is performed in the “+2 second re-variation” mode.

  In addition, as described above, the “2 second shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode (variation time: 50 seconds) is instructed by the main controller 110 in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. A variation effect effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 set when the variation pattern is a special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds) and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is “0”. This is an effect mode corresponding to the display variation pattern command “AA83H” (or “AB83H”). That is, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command “AA83H” (or “AB83H”), the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display “2 seconds shortened special reach variation”. Variation effect is performed in the “+2 second revariation” mode.

  These “2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (variation time: 40 seconds) and “2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (variation time: 50 seconds) are shown in FIG. As shown in (c), the timing from the start of the variation effect to the start of the low-speed variation of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is performed at the same timing as the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode. That is, the time related to the high-speed fluctuation of the left symbol row Z1 is shortened by 1 second compared with the normal super reach fluctuation mode or the special reach fluctuation mode, and the left symbol row Z1 is stopped 8 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started. . In addition, the time from when the right symbol row Z3 stops until the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started is further shortened by one second compared to the normal super reach fluctuation mode or the special reach fluctuation mode. 2 seconds after Z3 stops (that is, 11 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started. And, for the player to show whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the effect is the same 27 seconds as the normal super reach variation mode, or the normal special reach variation mode The middle symbol row Z2 is stopped 38 seconds or 48 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and the outreach symbol is temporarily displayed. In other words, the reach variation effect in which the variation time is shortened by 2 seconds from the normal super reach variation mode or the special reach variation mode is performed from the start of the variation effect until the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  Further, immediately after the reach variation effect is performed, in the same manner as the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second re-variation” mode, all the symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be visually recognized. A re-variation that begins to fluctuate again at a time of 2 seconds occurs during the 2 seconds produced by shortening the super-reach variation aspect or the special reach variation aspect. Note that the re-variation may start again so that only some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 slide in such a manner that the contents thereof can be visually recognized. Then, 40 seconds or 50 seconds after the start of fluctuation, all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the chance symbols ("3" and "4" in order from the left) are stopped. "1" symbol) is displayed on the middle line L2.

  As described above, also in the super reach variation mode or the special reach variation mode, the period during which the high-speed variation is performed is shortened, the re-variation is performed in the shortened time, and the chance pattern is displayed as the stop symbol. Therefore, the continuous notice effect can be surely performed within the time allotted to the super reach variation mode or the special reach variation by the main controller 110. In addition, the same effect as when the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode is set can be obtained.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition, the RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 24) of the sound lamp processing device is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process S1002, The command is analyzed by the processing of S1005, S1007, and S1010, and processing corresponding to the command is performed. The variation start flag is turned on when a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1003 in FIG. 24), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1203 in FIG. 26).

  The display control device 114 controls the variation display (variation effect) and continuous notice effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. On the output side of the output port 238, a third symbol display device 81 and a door solenoid 87a are connected. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the MPU 231 controls the opening and closing of the door 87 (excitation of the door solenoid 87a) in accordance with the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The work RAM 233 is a distribution number counter 233a, a first effect register 233b, a second effect register 233c, and a third effect. A register 233d is included.

  The distribution number counter 233a distributes one variation effect into a plurality of pseudo variation effects based on the display variation pattern command, and displays the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. This is a counter for counting the number of executions of typical fluctuation effects. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 sets a variation effect rendering mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command. In (see FIG. 31 and FIG. 32), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set.

  In the case of distribution to three pseudo variation effects (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are “AA61H” to “AA63H”, “AB61H” to “AB63H”), the value of the distribution number counter 233a. Is set to “2” (see S1707 in FIG. 31). Further, in the case of distribution to two pseudo variation effects (for example, display variation pattern commands are “AA41H” to “AA43H”, “AB41H” to “AB43H”, “AA51H” to “AA53H”, “AB51H”) In the case of “AB53H”, the value of the allocation number counter 233a is set to “1” (see S1714 and S1719 in FIG. 32). Further, when the pseudo variation effect cannot be distributed (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are “AA81H” to “AA83H”, “AB81H” to “AB83H”), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to “ 0 ”(see S1704 in FIG. 31).

  The display control device 114 refers to the distribution number counter 233a every time the variation effect is finished, and if the value is other than 0, the display control device 114 executes the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 33) and should be performed next. The effect mode of the pseudo variation effect is set, and the pseudo variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the newly set effect mode. Further, the distribution number counter 223a is updated every time the effect mode of the change effect is set in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 33) (see S1809 in FIG. 33). The distribution counter 233a is updated by reducing the value by 1 if the value of the distribution counter 233a is other than 0, and holding the value if the value of the distribution counter 233a is 0. Accordingly, the number of pseudo variation effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the distribution counter is set when the display variation pattern command is received. The pseudo variation effect of the number of times according to the value of 233a can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d are each a 1-byte register for setting the effect mode of the change effect, and the display control device 114 receives the change pattern command for display. Each of the registers is set based on the received display variation pattern command in the pseudo variation distribution processing (see FIG. 31 or FIG. 32) executed in the case of being performed.

  At this time, in the case of distribution to the three pseudo variation effects (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are “AA61H” to “AA63H”, “AB61H” to “AB63H”), The effect form of the variable effect is set in the third effect register 233d, the effect form of the second pseudo effect of change is set in the second effect register 233c, and the effect form of the third effect of change effect is the first. 1 effect register 233b. When distributed to two pseudo variation effects (for example, display variation pattern commands are "AA41H" to "AA43H", "AB41H" to "AB43H", "AA51H" to "AA53H", "AB51H" to "AB51H" In the case of “AB53H”), the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect is set in the second effect register 233c, and the effect mode of the second pseudo change effect is set in the first effect register 233b. . In addition, when it is not possible to distribute the pseudo variation effect (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are “AA81H” to “AA83H”, “AB81H” to “AB83H”), the variation effect effect mode is the first. The effect register 233b is set.

  The first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d set in the pseudo variation distribution process (see FIG. 31 or FIG. 32) are included in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 33). The variation effect production mode corresponding to each register is set according to the value of the register. For example, when the values of the first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d are set to “10H”, the “off-change” mode is used as the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the register. When set to “11H”, the “outward fluctuation + 1 second extension” mode is set, and when set to “12H”, the “outside fluctuation + 1.5 second extension” mode is set, and “13H” Is set to “off-shift fluctuation + slip effect”, and “14H” is set to “off-change with notice effect”. When the values of the first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d are set to “21H”, the “2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second revariation” mode is set, and “22H Is set to "2 seconds shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 seconds revariation" mode, and "23H" is set to "2 seconds shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 seconds revariation" mode. Is done.

  In addition, the work RAM 233 includes, as flags (not shown), an effect permission flag indicating whether or not the effect is permitted, a change start flag indicating whether or not the change effect should be started, and a change indicating whether or not the change effect is being performed. There is a middle flag and a stop flag indicating whether or not the variable display should be stopped. The effect permission flag is turned on when an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 28). Turned off (not shown). The variation start flag is turned on when a variation pattern command for display instructing the variation effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1404 in FIG. 28). When the fluctuating effect is started on the display device 81, it is turned off (see S1603 in FIG. 30). The changing flag is turned on when the changing effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1604 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when the changing effect is stopped (see S1611 in FIG. 30). The stop flag is turned on when a stop command for instructing stoppage of the variation effect is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1406 in FIG. 28), and the variation effect is stopped. (See S1611 in FIG. 30).

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data for presentation such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for variation effect after decompression (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect data”) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the variation effect data in correspondence with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the variation. As a result, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery and display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 16), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 699) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 699 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 699). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 699, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 699. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 16).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in And the value of the random number that becomes the big hit is set by the big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table. A jackpot is determined when the value matches a random number that is a jackpot. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period that is not probabilistic) and one for high probability (high probability) that has a higher probability of jackpot than that low probability. The number of random numbers that are included in the jackpot is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between a low probability and a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9), and the maximum value (for example, In the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 9, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 9). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball slot 64. Stored in the area.

  Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of detachment.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is a random number that is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the big hit It becomes. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 699. In the first per-random number counter C1, the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value “7,307” is stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 20, and the values “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471 , 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 "are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. In the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is “6, 7, 8, 9”, the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit (the maximum number of rounds is a big probability of 15 rounds and then shifts to a high probability state) On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “4, 5”, the big hit type shifts to the high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is two big hits The jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 1, 2, 3” is the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. After that, the transition to the low probability state is made, and during the time of 100 fluctuations, the time is short and big hit.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the three types of hits (the first probability variation big hit, the second probability variation big hit, and the short time big hit) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is comprised so that.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. And “rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 16) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 16).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process The main process will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 every 2 ms, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (699 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 699, 9, 99, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 20) accompanying the winning to the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and other periodically executed After executing the process (S506), the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and turns on the ball launch on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining / off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. That is, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the first entrance 64 by the process of S601 executed in one timer interrupt process (first timer interrupt process). After it is detected that it is off, it is detected that the first entrance switch is on by the process of S601 executed in the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process), and further timer When it is detected by the process of S601 executed in the interrupt process (the third timer interrupt process) that the first ball slot switch is on, there is a ball win at the first ball slot 64. Detect that. Thereby, when the output of the first entrance switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the winning of the ball.

  Next, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the holding number counter 203a (the holding number N of the variable effects held in the main controller 110) is the upper limit value. It is determined whether it is less than (4 in this embodiment) (S602). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number of suspended balls N <4 is not satisfied (S602: No). , Skips each processing after S603 (addition processing of the number N of holding times, acquisition processing of various counters, determination processing whether to permit display of the continuous notice effect, processing for generating the number of holding commands, etc.) End and return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the holding number N <4 (S602: Yes), the value of the holding number counter 203a (holding number N) is incremented by one. (S603) Further, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S503 are set to the first of the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S604).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the process of S604 (S605). Whether or not the jackpot is determined by whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the jackpot random number (winning value) indicated by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. Is done. Here, as described above, when the jackpot random number table is prepared, the low probability jackpot random number table and the high probability jackpot random number table are prepared, and the effect is changed by the holding ball held by the start winning this time. Which jackpot random number table is to be used is determined based on the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take.

  That is, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is normal low probability, the low probability jackpot random number table is used, and “7,307” among the values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 is “0,307”. Set as a win value. Further, at the time of high probability, a jackpot random number table for high probability time is used. 535, 568, 598, 618 "is set as the winning value. In the process of S605, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the process of S604 is compared with these hit values, and when they match, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

  As a result of the process of S605, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S605: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S604 is confirmed and set as a display mode for the big jackpot Three types, namely “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)” that transitions to a high probability state after a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and transition to high probability state after a maximum round number of 2 rounds of a jackpot “ "2nd probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)", the maximum number of rounds will shift to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and among the "time and bonus jackpot" that will be in a state of short time for 100 fluctuations, It is determined whether or not the display mode is the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) (S606). Here, as described above, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “6, 7, 8, 9” among the numerical values 0 to 9, it is determined as the first probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit). To do.

  If it is determined that the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) (S606: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “73H” (S607), and the process proceeds to S611. As a result, the high-order byte of the pending number command shown in FIG. 6 is generated in which the seventh to fourth bits are configured with a fixed value “0111”. Further, in this pending number command, the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to “1”, and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the 0th bit is set to “1”.

  In this way, in the case of a big win (15R probability variable big hit), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1”, so the continuous notice effect is displayed in the third symbol display. If displayed on the device 81, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player. In addition, since the game state flag after the continuous notice is set to “1”, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the continuous notice determination probability for determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect. As the table, the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 can be selected. In addition, with the post-continuous notice game state flag, the sound lamp control device 113 can make the determination to start the continuous notice effect in consideration of the game state after the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S605 that it is not a big hit (S605: No), then, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S604, the display mode at the time of the third It is determined whether or not the effect to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 is a front / rear reach (S608). As described above, when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is “98, 99” among the numerical values 0 to 99, it is determined that the reach is out of front and back. If it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached (S608: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “72H” (S609), and the process proceeds to S611. As a result, the high-order byte of the pending number command shown in FIG. 6 is generated in which the seventh to fourth bits are configured with a fixed value “0111”. Further, in this pending number command, the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to “1”, and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the 0th bit is set to “0”.

  Thus, even if the result of the lottery is out, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set when the display mode is a reach that impresses the player that it is one step ahead of the jackpot (a back and forth reach). Since it is set to “1”, if the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player until the fluctuation display of the back and forth reach is finished. In addition, since the game state flag after the continuous notice is set to “0”, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a continuous notice determination probability for determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect. As the table, it is possible to select the disconnection continuous notice determination table 222a1.

  As a result of the processing in S606, when it is determined that the display mode at the time of jackpot is not the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) (S606: No), and as a result of the processing in S608, the display mode at the time of losing Is determined not to be out-of-front reach (S608: No), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “70H” (S610), and the process proceeds to S611. The upper byte of the pending number command shown in FIG. 6 in which the seventh to fourth bits are configured with a fixed value of “0111” is generated. Also, in this pending number command, the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to “0”, and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the 0th bit is set to “0”. Thereby, in such a case, since the continuous notice effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, when the continuous notice effect is displayed, the display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result thereof. The aspect can always be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a back and forth reach. Therefore, the expectation given to the player when the continuous notice effect is displayed can be made higher.

  In the processing of S611, the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is set as the lower byte of the hold count command. Then, the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the hold number command shown in FIG. 6 is generated in which the seventh to fourth bits of the upper byte are configured with a fixed value of “0111” and the lower byte is configured with the hold number N.

  The pending number command set by the processes of S607, S609, S610, and S611 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the main process of the main controller 110. It is transmitted to the control device 113 (see S201 in FIG. 16).

  As described above, the start winning process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the main control device 110 is the jackpot (which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player as a result of the lottery with respect to the ball that has been won. In the case of a reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the big hit (front and rear reach reach), a continuous notice effect is given to the audio lamp control device 113. A continuous notice permission flag permitting the continuous notice effect is included in the hold count command and transmitted. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even in the case of forward / rearward reach and the like, and can execute the continuous notice effect under various conditions. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a startup process when the main controller 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S112 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Even in such a case, the process proceeds to S112. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S112, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S113, S114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S113, S114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S113, S114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S113, S114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the main process executed after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, the external data that is updated in the previous processing and is sent to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234. Output processing is executed (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S501 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 19) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the suspension number command set in the processes of S607, S609, S610, and S611 in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. The variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the big win state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (699, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the process of S202 (S210).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 21 has been executed, the power-off process after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 16). In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hold count counter 203a (the variable display hold count N held in the main controller 110) is greater than 0 (S303). If the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is not 0 (S303: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area Is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Although the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined to be a big hit or not according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the first probability variable big win ( The maximum number of rounds becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a 15-round jackpot, or the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a maximum round number of 2 rounds) Or a symbol that becomes a time bonus (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds). In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the first probability variation jackpot is reached after the jackpot, the red LED is turned on when the second probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED is turned on when the time bonus is hit. Turn on the LED and the blue LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, thereby ending the one variation display on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 17). This variation start process performs lottery (whether or not) determination of “big hit” or “out” based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol The variation effect pattern performed by the symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process (S306), first, a lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). ). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “7,307” is a winning value among the values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is normal low probability, and “28, “63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618” are hit values. In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these winning values, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. .

  If the result of S401 is determined to be a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and A display mode is set (S402). In the process of S402, the transition state after the jackpot set by the first hit type counter C2, that is, the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) which is one of the high probability states after the jackpot, or another Display state (LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether it shifts to a high probability state (second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)) or to a low probability state (short time bonus jackpot). Lighting state) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of “0, 1, 2, 3”, after that, the state shifts to a low probability state (hits in time and college), and in the case of “4, 5”. Thereafter, the state shifts to a high probability state (second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)), and in the case of “6, 7, 8, 9”, thereafter, a high probability state (first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) )).

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  When it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 Determine the variation time.

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is completed, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S406), and is set in the process of S402 or S404. A stop symbol command is set according to the stopped symbol (S407). These variation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the processing of S201 of the main processing (FIG. 16). The Then, when the process of S407 is completed, the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is on, the power-on process of S915 (see FIG. 23) depends on whether the current start-up process is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 23), it executes a power-off process in S915. The power-off processing flag is turned on before execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S915 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S915 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S915, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S915, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 23). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S915 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S808 through S804 to S806 is performed. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process in S809 is that if the process from S804 to S808 is reached via the process in S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S901). If 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S901: No), S902 to S909. The process proceeds to S910 without performing the process. In step S901, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S902 to S909 are processes related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the update process (see S1201 of FIG. 26) of the effect mode counter 223f and the command determination process of S911 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S901 (S901: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S907 described later. (S902) Then, a power-on notification process is executed (S903). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S904 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S904, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S905). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 85 according to the value of the hold number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S906). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S906 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S907), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S908). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S908, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S907 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S908 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The process of S910 is a process of setting an effect aspect of the change effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81 and transmitting a command instructing the set aspect to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S911). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power interruption processing is executed (S915). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. This process is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S911 in FIG. 23). As described above, the content of the command received from the main control device 110 is obtained. This is a process for determining. Also, in this process, when a hold number command is received from the main control device 110, a continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, the continuous notice determination counter 223b used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is updated (S1001). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is read from the RAM 223, and 1 is added thereto, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice determination counter 223b.

  Next, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 is determined. Determine. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1002: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1003), and the variation time is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1004). Return to the main process. The variation time extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used when a variation effect mode is set in a variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1002: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop symbol command has been received from the main controller 110. If it is determined that the stop symbol command has been received (S1005: Yes), the stop symbol command from the stop symbol (first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, time shortage hit, front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, Any of complete deviation is extracted (S1006), and the process returns to the main process. The stop symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223. Then, in a variable display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a stop symbol that is actually displayed by the third symbol display means is set from the extracted stop symbol and the value of each counter, and the set stop symbol is displayed. The display controller 114 is notified by the stop symbol command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop symbol command has not been received (S1005: No), it is then determined whether a hold count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1107). In the discrimination processing in S1107, if the seventh bit to the fourth bit of the upper byte of the command received from the main control device 110 are “0111” (binary number), the pending number command is received from the main control device 110. Judge. If it is determined that a hold count command has been received (S1007: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 203a of the main controller 110 stored in the lower byte of the hold count command (ie, held by the main controller 110). The number of times of variation effect hold) is extracted and stored in the hold number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1008).

  Here, since the number-of-holds command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), every time there is a start winning, the processing of S1008 is performed. The value of the hold number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the hold number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the number-of-holds counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the number-of-holds counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, The value of the counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the hold count counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  After the process of S1008, a continuous notice determination process is executed (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. In the continuous notice determination process, when the main control device 110 is notified of permission of the continuous notice effect by the hold count command, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is actually started. Details of this continuous notice determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S1007 that the pending number command has not been received (S1007: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. In step S1010, the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. To device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the continuous notice determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice determination process. This processing is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1009 in FIG. 24). As described above, the main control device 110 uses the hold count command. When the permission of the continuous notice effect is notified, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is actually started.

  In the continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the first bit (that is, continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is 1 (S1101), and it is determined that it is not 1 (that is, 0). If it has been performed (S1101: No), the main control device 110 determines that the continuous notice effect is not performed, so the subsequent processing is omitted and the processing returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is 1 (S1101: Yes), the main control device 110 determines that the continuous notice effect is permitted. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect in the subsequent processing after S1102.

  First, the processes of S1102 to S1110 are processes for determining whether or not any one of the following (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied. (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) If neither of these is satisfied, the process returns to the command determination process without determining the start of the continuous notice effect. Here, (Condition 1) is that the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in the variable effect reserved in the main controller 110, and (Condition 2) is the variable effect reserved in the main controller 110. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set in at least a part of the game state, and the game state after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set becomes “big hit”, and the number of holding times There are two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the fluctuating effects (holding spheres) corresponding to the number of hold times included in the command and the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) for which execution of continuous notice effects is set. (That is, the difference between the value of the holding number counter 223a and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 3 or more), and (Condition 3) is that at least the variation effect held in the main controller 110 is at least Execution of the continuous notice effect is set in some, and the game state after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set becomes “Exit”. The game state after the continuous notice effect in which permission is newly notified is “big hit”.

  In the processing of S1102, the value of the holding number counter 223a is substituted into the variable A, and then the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is substituted into the variable B (S1103). Further, a status flag is provided in the RAM 223, and “0” is set as an initial value (S1104). This state flag is a flag indicating whether or not (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and is set to “1” when it is determined that (Condition 3) is satisfied. As will be described in detail later, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, if this state flag is set to “1”, that is, the condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied in a state satisfying (Condition 3). When the start is determined, a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) for which the continuous notice effect is newly set is performed as a special mode (see S1118 to S1121).

  After the process of S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice counter 223c) is 0 (S1105). If the value of the variable B is determined to be 0 (S1105: Yes) ) Since the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in the variable effect held in the main controller 110 and it can be determined that the above (Condition 1) is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1111 and the process after S1111 is performed. Whether to start the continuous notice effect is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223c) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1105: No), at least a part of the variation effect reserved in the main controller 110. Since it can be determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been set, it is then determined whether or not the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous notice is 1 (S1106). If the value of the post-continuous notice state flag 223d is 1 (S1106: Yes), the game state after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Is in the “big hit” state, and further, the difference between the value of the variable A (ie, the hold count counter 223a) and the value of the variable B (ie, the continuous notice count counter 223c) is calculated. Substituting (S1107), it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1108). As a result, when it is determined that the variable C is 3 or more (S1108: Yes), the change effect (holding ball) corresponding to the hold count included in the received hold count command and the execution of the continuous notice effect at the present time are executed. It can be determined that there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between the last set fluctuating effects (holding balls). Therefore, since it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, and the processing of S1108 that the above (Condition 2) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the processing of S1111 and the continuous notice effect is started by the processing after S1111. It is determined whether or not to do so.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) as a result of the processing of S1108, a variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the holding number included in the received holding number command is Since there are no two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set at the present time, the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, From the result of the processing in S1108, it can be determined that none of the above-described (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the subsequent process is omitted, and the process returns to the command determination process without determining the start of the continuous notice effect.

  Here, when the value of the post-continuous notice state flag 223d is 1 (S1106: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily changed by the change effect after the continuous notice effect set at the present time is performed. Since the game is in a “big hit” state, the player's expectation due to the continuous announcement effect is temporarily interrupted by this “big hit”. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, the number of hold times included in the received hold number command is increased. There are two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the corresponding fluctuating effects (holding spheres) and the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) for which execution of continuous notice effects is set. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, chance chances can be displayed as stop symbols in two or more variable effects performed after the “big hit”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous notice effect, or to enhance the sense of expectation that the player feels about the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1106, when the value of the state flag 223d after continuous notice is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1106: No), in all the changing effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Since the game state after the fluctuating effect after the continuous notice effect is performed becomes a “disconnected” state, the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main controller 110 (that is, the game after the continuous notice effect) It is determined whether or not the value of the (status flag) is 1 (S1109). Then, when the value of the 0th bit (that is, the gaming state flag after continuous notice) of the high-order byte of the hold count command is 1 (S1109: Yes), after the continuous notice effect in which permission is newly notified by the hold count command. It can be determined that the gaming state of the game is “big hit”. Therefore, since it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, and the processing of S1109 that the above (Condition 3) is satisfied, the status flag provided in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1104 is set to “1”. , (Condition 3) is satisfied (S1110), the process proceeds to S1111. Then, whether or not to start the continuous notice effect is determined by the processing after S1111.

  On the other hand, when it is determined as a result of the processing of S1109 that the value of the 0th bit (that is, the gaming state flag after continuous notice) is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1109: No) ) Since the gaming state after the continuous notice effect in which permission is newly notified by the number-of-holds command is “out”, the above-described (condition 1) is obtained from the results of the processing of S1105, S1106, and S1109. ) To (Condition 3). Therefore, in this case, the subsequent process is omitted, and the process returns to the command determination process without determining the start of the continuous notice effect.

  Here, when the value of the post-continuous notice state flag 223d is 0 (S1106: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily changed to “ It will be in the “disengaged” state. In such a situation, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the gaming state after the continuous notice effect newly notified of permission by the hold number command is `` big hit '', When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a “disconnected” state after the current continuous notification effect set at the current time is performed, the continuous notification effect is further performed and the “removed” state is entered again. Can be prevented. Therefore, it can suppress that the case where it will be in a "displacement" state after a continuous notice effect is generated continuously. In addition, when a continuous notice effect is performed after a continuous notice effect has been performed, and a continuous notice effect is subsequently performed, the player can have a strong expectation of being a “big hit”. Motivation to continue the gaming machine can be given.

  Thus, in the processing of S1102 to S1110, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous notice determination process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, if none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the process after S1111 for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is not executed, and therefore the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect is performed reliably and easily. You can prevent it from being broken. Moreover, since the process after S1111 is abbreviate | omitted, the increase in the processing burden in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the processing of S1111 to S1113, the continuous notice determination used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect from the two continuous notice determination tables 222a (the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 or the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2). Select the table (see FIG. 7).

  First, in the processing of S1111, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit (that is, the game state flag after continuous notice) is 1 in the upper-order byte of the hold count command. Since the later gaming state is a big hit, the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as the continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect (S1112). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 0th bit (the gaming state flag after continuous notice) is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1111: No), the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect is determined. Since it is off, the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected as the continuous notice determination table to be used (see FIG. 7) (S1113).

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1111-S1113, the value of the hold count counter 223a ( That is, the continuous notice determination range associated with the number of variable effects held in the main controller 110 is specified, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice determination counter 223b (S114). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is included in the continuous notice determination range, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is started (S1115).

  As a result, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1115: No), the process after S1116 is skipped and the process returns to the main process. That is, the setting of the continuous notice counter 223c is held as it is. Accordingly, when there is a holding ball set to perform the change effect notice by the continuous notice determination counter 223b, the continuous notice effect is performed for the reserved ball, and when such a holding ball does not exist, There is no continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is started (S1115: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 223a is set in the continuous notice number counter 223c ( In addition, the value of the 0th bit (the gaming state flag after continuous notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set in the state flag 223d after continuous notice (S1117). Here, by setting the value of the holding number counter 223a in the continuous notice number counter 223c by the processing of S1116, in all the holding balls held before the holding ball indicated by the holding number command received this time, The execution of the continuous notice effect is set together with the change effect in the reserved ball. In other words, chances can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuating effects corresponding to the holding ball held before the holding ball notified by the holding number command received this time.

  Further, since the value of the post-continuous notice state flag included in the hold count command is set in the post-continuous notice state flag 223d by the process of S1117, the change after the continuous notice effect set by the process of S1116 has ended. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 obtained by the production can be maintained. Then, when the continuous notice determination process is executed again, the above-described (Condition 2) or (Condition 3) is satisfied by using the value of the post-continuous notice state flag 223d set here by the process of S1106. It can be determined whether or not.

  After the process of S1117, it is then determined whether or not the status flag provided in the RAM 223 is 1 by the process of S1104 (S1118). If the status flag is 1 (S1118: Yes), (condition 3) is set. Since it can be determined that the start of the continuous notice effect is determined in a satisfied state, in the subsequent processes of S1119 to S1121, the effect form of the continuous notice effect in the variation effect (holding ball) newly set to execute the continuous notice effect this time. As a special mode.

  In other words, the B-th bit of the continuous notice mode flag 223e indicated by the variable B is set to 1 (S1119), and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect that is set to be executed for the fluctuating effect corresponding to the (B + 1) th reserved ball. As a special mode. Next, 1 is added to the variable B (S1120), and it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B added by 1 is equal to the value of the variable A (S1121). If the value of the variable B added by 1 is not equal to the value of the variable A (S1121: No), the process returns to the process of S1119, and the processes of S1119 to S1121 are executed again. On the other hand, when the value of the variable B added by 1 is equal to the value of the variable A (S1121: Yes), the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the value of the variable B when shifting from the processing of S1118 to the processing of S1119 is substituted by the processing of S1103 (before a new value is set by the processing of S1116). That is, it represents the number of variable effects for which a continuous notice effect has been set in the past. The value of the variable A is the value of the holding number counter 223a substituted by the processing of S1102, and represents the number of fluctuating effects (holding balls) that are currently held in the main controller 110. Therefore, by repeating the processing of S1119 to S1121 until the value of the variable B becomes equal to the value of the variable A, the variation effect suspended after the variation effect for which the continuous notice effect has been set in the past (that is, The effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is newly set this time is set to the special mode.

  Thus, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by satisfying the above (Condition 3), the effect form of the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the new continuous notice effect is newly set is obtained. Even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “disconnected” state as a result of the continuous announcement effect set in the past being set as a special mode, the newly set continuous announcement is made thereafter. Since the performance is executed in a special mode, it is possible to strongly give the player a sense of expectation that is a “hit” by the special mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the fluctuation display process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the variation display process. This processing is executed in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S910 in FIG. 23), and as described above, the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. In this case, it is a process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and transmitting a command instructing the set mode to the display control device 114.

  In the variable display process, first, an update process of the effect mode counter 223f is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (3 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the effect mode counter 223f is stored in the RAM 223.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1202). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1202: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. End and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1202: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1203), and is extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 24). The variation time in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1204).

  Next, the stop state symbol of the variation effect extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S1006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 24) is acquired from the RAM 223, and after the variation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “big hit” state. It is determined whether or not to make (S1205). If the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not set to the “big hit” state after the variation effect (S1205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 2 or more (S1206).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 2 or more (S1206: Yes), execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, so the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 27) is executed. (S1208), the process proceeds to S1209. As a result, instead of the variation pattern instructed by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 as the variation mode effect mode or stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode and stop symbol (chance) shown in FIG. Eye) is set. Therefore, the variation effect can be performed in an effect mode suitable for the continuous notice effect, and the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the change effect is stopped. The details of the continuous notice setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1205, if it is determined that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “big hit” state after the change effect (S1205: Yes), and the result of the processing of S1206, the value of the continuous notice count counter 223c. Is not 2 or more (that is, less than 2), and it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for the change effect, or the last change effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. If it has been performed (S1206: No), the effect of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the stop symbol command The instructed stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209.

  Here, if it is determined by the processing of S1205 that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “big hit” state after the change effect, regardless of whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect. Through the processing of S1207, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 and the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command are set. This is because, in this embodiment, the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed without taking into consideration the game state after the change effect, so that the setting can be easily performed. If the game state after the variation effect for which the execution is set is “big hit”, it is not possible to display the chance symbol that is also a losing symbol as a stop symbol of the variation effect, and the chance item after the jackpot symbol On the other hand, there is a risk of suppressing the player's feeling of uplifting.

  Therefore, if it is determined that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “big hit” state after the change effect, the main controller 110 determines whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect. By setting the effect mode of the change effect corresponding to the change pattern (change time) specified by the change pattern command and the stop symbol specified by the stop symbol command, the player is given a “big hit” by the change effect. Can have a high expectation for

  In addition, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is 1 in the process of S1206, it is the last variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Similarly to the case where the value of the number counter 223c is 0, a predetermined stop symbol is set in accordance with the variation effect mode notified from the main control device 110.

  Next, update processing of the continuous notice number counter 223c is executed (S1209). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c is decremented by 1, and when the counter value becomes 0, the value is held. Then, the updated value of the continuous notice counter 223 c is stored in the RAM 223.

  Next, in the process of S1210, the change pattern command for display which instruct | indicates the production aspect of the change effect in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 set by S1207 or S1208, and the stop symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 are displayed. The stop symbol command for display to instruct is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1210). The display control device 114 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with these commands.

  Then, in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (completion of the setting of the variable display corresponding to the holding ball), the value of the holding number counter 223a is decreased by 1 (S1211), and the content of the continuous notice mode flag 223e is only 1 bit on the right At the same time as shifting, 0 is inserted into the vacant bit (seventh bit) (S1212), and this variable display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the continuous notice setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice setting process. This process is executed in the variable display process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1208 in FIG. 26). As described above, the continuous notice effect is executed for the variable effect. Is set instead of the variation pattern and stop symbol instructed by the variation pattern command and stop symbol command from the main control device 110 as the effect mode and stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. 9 is a process for setting the effect mode and the stop symbol (chance eye) shown in FIG.

  In the continuous notice setting process, first, the process of S1301 to S1316 is changed with respect to the display control device 114 based on the change time acquired by the process of S1204 of the change display process and the value of the effect mode counter 223f. A display variation pattern command for instructing an effect mode of the effect is set.

  In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time acquired by the process of S1204 of the fluctuation display process is 11 seconds (S1301). If the variation time is 11 seconds (S1301: Yes), the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is out of variation, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, regardless of the value of the effect mode counter 223f. First, AA01H is set as the display variation pattern command (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1317. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, the “outside variation” mode is set as the variation display effect mode.

  On the other hand, when the variation time is not 11 seconds (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0 (S1303), and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0 ( Further, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time acquired by the process of S1204 of the fluctuation display process is 25 seconds (S1304). If it is determined that the variation time is 25 seconds (S1304: Yes), the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a normal reach variation, and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is obtained as a result of the processing of S1303. Is 0, AA81H is set as the display variation pattern command (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1317. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second re-variation” mode is set as an effect mode of the variable display.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time is not 25 seconds as a result of the processing of S1304 (S1304: No), it is then determined whether or not the variation time is 40 seconds (S1306). If it is determined that the variation time is 40 seconds (S1306: Yes), the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a super reach variation, and, as a result of the processing in S1303, the effect mode counter 223f Since the value is 0, AA82H is set as the display variation pattern command (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1317. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, the “2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 second re-variation” mode is set as an effect mode of the variable display.

  If it is determined that the variation time is not 40 seconds as a result of the processing of S1306 (S1306: No), the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a special reach variation (variation time: 50 seconds), As a result of the process of S1303, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0, so AA83H is set as the display variation pattern command (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1317. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, the “2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode is set as the variation display effect mode.

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is not 0 (that is, any one of 1 to 3) as a result of the processing of S1303, the variation time acquired by the processing of S1204 of the variation display processing is further performed. Is determined to be 25 seconds (S1309). If it is determined that the variation time is 25 seconds (S1309: Yes), the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a normal reach variation, and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is obtained as a result of the processing of S1303. Is one of 1 to 3, AA40H is first set as the display variation pattern command (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1314.

  In the process of S1314, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added to the display variation pattern command. Thereby, when the variation pattern instructed from the main controller 110 is a normal reach variation, any one of “AA41H”, “AA42H”, and “AA43H” is displayed as the variation pattern command for display according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Therefore, the normal reach variation mode instructed by the main controller 110 is distributed into two pseudo variation effects as shown in FIGS.

  When the display variation pattern command is “AA41H”, the display control device 114 sets the “outside variation” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and the second pseudo variation. As an effect mode of the effect, a “out-of-shift fluctuation + slip effect” mode is set. Further, when the display variation pattern command is “AA42H”, the display control device 114 sets the “out-of-range variation + slip effect” mode as the first pseudo variation effect mode, and the second simulation mode. As an effect mode of a typical change effect, a “out-of-range change” mode is set. When the display variation pattern command is “AA43H”, the display control device 114 sets the “outside variation + 1.5-second extension” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect. As the production mode of the pseudo variation production, the “outside variation + 1.5 second extension” mode is set.

  After the process of S1314, it is determined whether or not the variation time is 40 seconds (S1315). If the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, it is determined in the processing of S1315 that the fluctuation time is not 40 seconds (S1315: No), and the process proceeds to S1317.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time is not 25 seconds as a result of the processing in S1309 (S1309: No), it is then determined whether or not the variation time is 40 seconds (S1311). If it is determined that the variation time is 40 seconds (S1311: Yes), the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is a super reach variation, and as a result of the processing of S1303, the effect mode counter 223f Since the value is any one of 1 to 3, AA50H is first set as the display variation pattern command (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1314.

  In the process of S1314, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added to the display variation pattern command, as in the case of the normal reach variation. As a result, commands “AA51H” to “AA53H” are generated. Next, it is determined again whether or not the variation time is 40 seconds (S1315). If the variation time is 40 seconds (S1315: Yes), the lower byte of the display variation pattern command is rewritten (S1316). ), The process proceeds to S1317. That is, when the lower byte of the display variation pattern command is “AA53H” or more, it is rewritten to “AA52H”. In other cases, the display variation pattern command obtained in step S1314 is held as it is.

  Thereby, when the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a super reach variation, either “AA51H” or “AA52H” is generated as a variation pattern command for display according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Therefore, the reach variation mode instructed by the main control device 110 is distributed into two pseudo variation effects as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11.

  When the display variation pattern command is “AA51H”, the display control device 114 sets the “outside variation + 1 second extension” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and the second simulation As an effect mode of a typical change effect, a “displacement change with a notice effect” is set. Further, when the display variation pattern command is “AA52H”, the display control device 114 sets the “offset variation with notice effect” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and the second simulation. As an effect mode of a typical change effect, an “out-of-range change + 1 second extension” mode is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time is not 40 seconds as a result of the processing of S1311 (S1311: No), the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is a special reach variation (variation time: 50 seconds), Further, as a result of the process of S1303, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is any one of 1 to 3, so AA60H is first set as the display variation pattern command (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314.

  In the process of S1314, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added to the display variation pattern command. Thereby, when the variation pattern instructed from the main controller 110 is a special reach variation, any one of “AA61H”, “AA62H”, and “AA63H” is displayed as a variation pattern command for display according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Therefore, the special reach fluctuation mode instructed by the main controller 110 is distributed into three pseudo fluctuation effects as shown in FIGS. 9 and 12.

  When the display variation pattern command is “AA61H”, the display control apparatus 114 sets the “out-of-range variation” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and the second pseudo variation. As the effect mode of the effect, the “outside variation” mode is set, and as the effect mode of the third pseudo variation effect, the “outside variation with notice effect” is set. When the display variation pattern command is “AA62H”, the display control device 114 sets the “outside variation” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and the second pseudo variation. As the effect mode of the effect, the “outside variation with the notice effect” mode is set, and as the effect mode of the third pseudo variation effect, the “outside change” mode is set. Further, when the display variation pattern command is “AA63H”, the display control device 114 sets the “offset variation with notice effect” mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and the second simulation. The “out-of-change” mode is set as the effect mode of the typical variation effect, and the “out-of-change” mode is set as the effect mode of the third pseudo variation effect.

  After the process of S1314, it is determined whether or not the variation time is 40 seconds (S1315). If the fluctuation time is 50 seconds, it is determined in the processing of S1315 that the fluctuation time is not 40 seconds (S1315: No), and the process proceeds to S1317.

  In the process of S1317, a chance item (the symbols on the middle line L2 are “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left symbol row Z1) is set as the stop symbol. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a chance symbol on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol when the variation effect is stopped, including a pseudo variation effect. The player can recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chances as the stop symbol after the variable display on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the first bit (that is, the bit corresponding to the first reserved ball) of the continuous notice mode flag is 1 (S1318), and if it is 1 (S1318: Yes), S1301. 0100H is added to the display variation pattern command set by the processing of .about.S1316 (S1319), the continuous notice setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation display processing. As a result, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is changed from “AAH” to “ABH”. Therefore, the display control device 114 sets the 0th bit of the upper byte of the received display variation pattern command to “1”. If it is set, the chance color can be set to be a special color when the chance pattern is displayed as the stop pattern of the variation effect (see S1727 in FIG. 31).

  On the other hand, when the value of the first bit of the continuous notice mode flag (that is, the bit corresponding to the first reserved ball) is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1318: No), the process of S1319 is omitted, The continuous notice setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation display process. As a result, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is maintained as “AAH”. Therefore, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is set to “0” in the display control device 114. When the chance eye is displayed as the stop pattern of the variation effect, the background color is set to be the normal color (see S1728 in FIG. 31).

  As described above, in the continuous notice setting process, based on the time allocated to the variation pattern by the main control device 110, a plurality of pseudo variation effect effects distributed from the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110. Each aspect is set. As a result, it is possible to appropriately set a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects within the fluctuation time assigned to the fluctuation pattern instructed by main controller 110.

  In addition, in the variable display effect process including the continuous notice setting process, the change time indicated by the change pattern command from the main control device 110, the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol command, and the continuous notice permission flag indicated by the hold count command are displayed. In response, the details of the variation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol, and the execution of the continuous notice effect are set.

  Here, in a general pachinko machine, a big win lottery is performed by the main control device, but in order to prevent delays and malfunctions of the lottery processing, it is required to keep the processing load on the main control device small. On the other hand, the main control device 110 only performs a rough setting regarding the fluctuation effect and the continuous notice effect and a command transmission for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the setting, so that the main control device 110 is notified. Such processing load can be reduced. In addition, since the main controller 110 can reduce the determined production patterns, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced, and the cost of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 221 having high processing capability is installed in the audio lamp control device 113, various effects can be set in response to various commands from the main control device 110. Further, even when a high load is required for the processing related to the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect can be easily performed. Thereby, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is suppressed, various effects can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, and an effect that does not bore the player can be devised.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on and external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

  First, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the external interrupt process is executed, the received command is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  In this external interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a production permission command (S1401). If it is a production permission command (S1401: Yes), the production permission flag of the work RAM 233 is turned on ( S1402), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not an effect permit command (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not the received command is a display variation pattern command (S1403), and if it is a display variation pattern command ( (S1403: Yes), the variation start flag of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1404), and the external interrupt process is terminated. At this time, the received display variation pattern command is stored in the work RAM 233, and the effect mode of the variation effect is generated based on the display variation pattern command by a pseudo variation distribution process (see FIGS. 31 and 32) described later. Set.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a display variation pattern command as a result of the processing of S1403 (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not the received command is a stop command (S1405). (S1405: Yes), the stop flag of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1406), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If the received command is not a stop command as a result of the process of S1405 (S1405: No), the process corresponding to the other received command is executed (S1407), and the external interrupt process is terminated. For example, if the received command is a display stop symbol command, a process of setting a stop symbol to be displayed after the change effect is stopped in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Next, a main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114, and this main process is started when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Thereafter, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1502), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1503). Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 is different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the character information decompressed in the processing of S1503. The extracted character information is written in the area (S1504).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the effect permission flag is turned on in order to determine whether or not the effect permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S1505). If the effect permission flag is not turned on (S1505). : No), the process after S1506 is waited until the production permission command is transmitted from the main controller 110, that is, until the production permission flag is turned on.

  If the result permission flag is turned on as a result of the determination in S1505 (S1505: Yes), the character information extracted in the processing in S1504 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And it transfers to the process after S1506.

  In the process of S1506, it is determined whether or not the display being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit (S1506: No), the third symbol display device 81 has a variable effect or The variable effect process for displaying the continuous notice effect is executed (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509. The details of this variation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1506 is that the jackpot is being hit (S1506: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1508). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, background images and the like that are different for each round are updated (new extraction of character information from the video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information). Write). After the big hit effect process (S1508) ends, the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, in order to execute the process (S1506 to S1508) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 milliseconds, it is confirmed whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the process of S1506 was started. If not (S1509), the process waits until 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed (S1509: No). If 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed (S1509: Yes), the process proceeds to S1506. The processing from S1506 to S1509 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the variation effect process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. This variation effect process is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 (see S1507 in FIG. 29). As described above, the variation effect process is performed on the third symbol display device 81. This is a process of displaying the chance eye with the stop symbol of the variation effect as the continuous notice effect.

  In the change effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the changing flag indicating that the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 provided in the work RAM 233 is changing is on (S1601). If the changing flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S1601: No), the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changing. Next, the third symbol provided in the work RAM 233 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is on in the display device 81 (S1602). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S1602: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1603), the fluctuation flag is turned on (S1604), and the pseudo fluctuation distribution process is executed (S1605).

  This pseudo-variation distribution process is a process of allocating one variation effect (holding sphere) to a plurality of pseudo variation effects according to the contents of the display variation pattern command. The effect mode of the pseudo variation effect is determined. In addition, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of pseudo variation effects that have been distributed is set in the distribution number counter 233a. Further, when the display variation pattern command is not assigned to the pseudo variation effect, the variation effect effect mode is determined based on the display variation pattern command. In this case, 0 is set as the value of the distribution number counter 233a. The details of the pseudo variation distribution process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

  Next, the variation effect setting process is executed (S1606), and the pseudo variation to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 from the pseudo variation effects distributed in the pseudo variation distribution process. The production mode of production is set. In the case of not allocating to the pseudo variation effect, the effect mode of the variation effect determined in the pseudo variation distribution process is set. Further, the value of the distribution number counter 233a is updated in accordance with the setting of the effect mode of the variable effect. That is, when the distribution number counter 233a is 1 or more, the value is decreased by 1, and when it is 0, the value is held. The details of the variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the fluctuation effect data of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect effect mode set by the processing of S1606 is read from the video RAM according to the change elapsed time, and an image based on the read data is displayed as the third design. The data is displayed on the LCD of the display device 81 (S1607), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can execute the variation effect in the effect mode according to the display variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, if the changing flag is on as a result of the processing of S1601 (S1601: Yes), the display executed in the third symbol display device 81 is changing, and then the changing display provided in the RAM 233 is displayed. It is determined whether or not a stop flag for instructing to stop is turned on (S1608). If the stop flag is on (S1608: Yes), the stop flag and the changing flag are turned off (S1611), and the stop symbol set by the display stop symbol command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The symbols to be displayed are stopped (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. Here, in the process of S1612, if the background color of the stop pattern of the change effect is set to a special color in the pseudo variable distribution process (S1605) (see S1727 of FIG. 31), the background color of the stop pattern Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in red. Further, if the background color of the stop symbol of the variation effect is set to a special color (see S1728 in FIG. 31), the background color of the stop symbol is displayed in blue on the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the case where the chance notice is displayed with the stop symbol and the continuous notice effect is performed, if the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the continuous notice effect is executed in a special mode, the pseudo variable distribution process ( Since the background color of the stop symbol is set to a special color in S1605), the chance symbols are continuously displayed as the stop symbol, and the background color when displaying the chance symbols is set to a red color different from the normal blue color. As a result, a higher sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1608, if the stop flag is not on, that is, is off (S1608: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 0, and the distribution number counter 233a. If the value of is not 0 (S1609: No), since there is a pseudo variation effect in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81, it is further set by the variation effect setting process of S1606. Then, it is determined whether or not the currently performed pseudo variation effect has been completed (S1610). If it is determined that the pseudo variation effect has been completed (S1610: Yes), the process proceeds to S1606, and the variation effect setting process is performed. Therefore, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the process proceeds to S1607. Thus, a plurality of pseudo variation effects distributed by the pseudo variation distribution process can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1609 that the value of the distribution number counter is 0 (S1609: Yes), whether all the distributed pseudo variation effects have been set by the variation effect setting processing, or 1 Since one variation effect (holding ball) is not distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the process proceeds to S1607 and is based on the variation effect data according to the variation elapsed time in the currently set effect mode. An image is displayed on the LCD. Further, when it is determined by the processing of S1610 that the currently performed pseudo variation effect set by the variation effect setting process of S1606 has not ended (S1610: No), the process proceeds to S1608. Then, an image based on the change effect data corresponding to the change elapsed time is displayed on the LCD in the effect mode currently set.

  Further, as a result of the processing of S1601 and S1602, when the changing flag is not on (ie, is off) (S1601: No), and the change start flag is not on (ie, is off) (S1602: No) In other display processing, for example, a customer waiting effect that is displayed when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player is displayed, and the variation effect process is terminated.

  With reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the pseudo-variable distribution process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 are flowcharts showing the pseudo variation distribution process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. This pseudo variation distribution processing is executed in the variation effect processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 (see S1605 in FIG. 30), and as described above, the contents of the display variation pattern command. According to the process, one variation effect (holding ball) is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects.

  In this pseudo variation distribution process, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the values of the seventh bit to the fourth bit of the lower byte of the display variation pattern command stored in the work RAM 233 in the process of S1404 of the external interrupt process are obtained. The variable P is substituted (S1701), and the values from the third bit to the 0th bit of the lower byte of the display variation pattern command are substituted into the variable Q (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable P is 8 (S1703). If the value of the variable P is 8 (S1703: Yes), the display variation pattern commands are “AA81H” to “AA83H”, “ Since it corresponds to any one of “AB81H” to “AB83H” (see FIG. 9), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 0 (S1704), and the value obtained by adding 20H to the variable Q is set to the first effect register 233b. (S1705), and the process proceeds to S1726.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command is “AA81H” or “AB81H” (that is, when the variable Q is 1), 21H is set in the first effect register 233b, and therefore the third symbol display device In 81, the variation effect is executed in the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (see FIG. 13A). Further, when the display variation pattern command is “AA82H” or “AB82H” (that is, when the variable Q is 2), 22H is set in the first effect register 233b. The variation effect is executed in the “2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (see FIG. 13B). Further, when the display variation pattern command is “AA83H” or “AB83H” (that is, when the variable Q is 3), 23H is set in the first effect register 233b, so the third symbol display device 81 The variation effect is executed in the “2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second revariation” mode (see FIG. 13C).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable P is not 8 as a result of the processing of S1703 (S1703: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variable P is 6 (S1706). Is 6 (S1706: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponds to any one of “AA61H” to “AA63H”, “AB61H” to “AB63H” (see FIG. 9), so the distribution number counter 233a The value is set to 2 (S1707). Thereby, it is distributed to three pseudo variation effects.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1708). If the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1708: Yes), the display variation pattern command is “AA61H” or “AB61H”. Therefore, 14H is set in the first effect register 233b, 10H is set in the second effect register 233c, 10H is set in the third effect register 233d (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1726.

  Here, when the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 2 by the variation effect setting process (see S1606 in FIG. 30), the third effect register 233d, the second effect register 233c, and the first effect register 233b are in this order. Thus, since the fluctuating effect of the pseudo fluctuating effect is set, the first fictitious fluctuating effect is executed in the “outside fluctuation” mode, and the second pseudo fluctuating effect is executed in the “outside fluctuation” mode. Then, the third pseudo variation effect is executed in a “displacement variation with a notice effect” (see FIG. 12B).

  If the value of the variable Q is not 1 as a result of the processing of S1708 (S1708: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 2 (S1710), and if the value of the variable Q is 2 (S1710: Yes) Since the display variation pattern command is “AA62H” or “AB62H”, 10H is set in the first effect register 233b, 14H is set in the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d. Is set to 10H (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1726. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation” mode, the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation with notice effect” mode, and the third pseudo variation effect is performed. Is executed in the “out-of-range variation” mode (see FIG. 12C).

  As a result of the processing of S1710, when the value of the variable Q is not 2 (S1710: No), the display variation pattern command is “AA63H” or “AB63H”, so 10H is set in the first effect register 233b. 10H is set in the second effect register 233c, 14H is set in the third effect register 233d (S1712), and the process proceeds to S1726. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation with notice effect” mode, the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation” mode, and the third pseudo variation effect is performed. Is executed in the “out-of-range variation” mode (see FIG. 12D).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable P is not 6 as a result of the process of S1706 (S1706: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1713 shown in FIG. 32 and whether the value of the variable P is 5 or not. Is determined. If the value of the variable P is 5 (S1713: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponds to one of “AA51H”, “AA52H”, “AB51H”, and “AB52H” (see FIG. 9). The value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 1 (S1714). Thereby, it is distributed to two pseudo fluctuation effects.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1715). If the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1715: Yes), the display variation pattern command is “AA51H” or “AB51H”. Therefore, 14H is set in the first effect register 233b, 11H is set in the second effect register 233c (S1716), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG.

  Here, when the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 2 by the change effect setting process (see S1606 in FIG. 30), the pseudo change in the order of the second effect register 233c and the first effect register 233b. Since the variation effect of the effect is set, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside change + 1 second extension” mode, and the second pseudo change effect is executed in the “outside change with notice effect” mode. (See FIG. 11B).

  If the value of the variable Q is not 1 as a result of the processing of S1715 (S1715: No), the display variation pattern command is “AA52H” or “AB52H”, so that 11H is set in the first effect register 233b. 14H is set in the 2 effect register 233c (S1717), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation with the notice effect” mode, and the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside change + 1 second extension” mode (FIG. 11 (c). )reference).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable P is not 5 as a result of the processing of S1713 (S1713: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variable P is 4 (S1718). Is 4 (S1718: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponds to one of “AA41H” to “AA43H”, “AB41H” to “AB43H” (see FIG. 9), and therefore the distribution number counter 233a The value is set to 1 (S1719). Thereby, it is distributed to two pseudo fluctuation effects.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1720). If the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1720: Yes), the display variation pattern command is “AA41H” or “AB41H”. Therefore, 13H is set in the first effect register 233b, 10H is set in the second effect register 233c (S1721), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation” mode, and the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation + slip effect” mode (see FIG. 10B). .

  If the value of the variable Q is not 1 as a result of the processing of S1720 (S1720: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 2 (S1722), and if the value of the variable Q is 2 (S1722: Yes) Since the display variation pattern command is “AA42H” or “AB42H”, 10H is set in the first effect register 233b, and 13H is set in the second effect register 233c (S1723). The process proceeds to S1726 in S31. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside change + slip effect” mode, and the second pseudo change effect is executed in the “outside change” mode (see FIG. 10C). .

  If the value of the variable Q is not 2 as a result of the processing of S1722 (S1722: No), the display variation pattern command is “AA43H” or “AB43H”, so 12H is set in the first effect register 233b. 12H is set in the 2 effect register 233c (S1724), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation + 1.5 second extension” mode, and the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the “outside variation + 1.5 second extension” mode ( (Refer FIG.12 (d)).

  In addition, when the value of the variable P is not 4 as a result of the processing of S1718 (S1718: No), while setting the variation effect according to the other variation pattern command for display and distributing to the pseudo variation effect, A value corresponding to the number of distributions is set in the distribution number counter 233a, and if it is not distributed to a pseudo variation effect, the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 0 (S1725), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. Transition.

  Returning to FIG. 31, in the processing of S1726, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is 1. If it is 1 (S1726: Yes), it is determined that the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the continuous notice effect is executed in a special manner, and the chance of the variable effect stop pattern as the continuous notice effect is obtained. The background color for displaying eyes is set to a special color (red) (S1727), and the process proceeds to S1729. In addition, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is not 1 (that is, 0), the background color when the chance eye is displayed on the stop pattern of the variation effect as the continuous notice effect is the normal color (Blue) is set (S1728), and the process proceeds to S1729. As a result, according to the value of the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command, the background color when the chance eye is displayed on the stop symbol of the variation effect as a continuous notice effect is set to a special color or the normal color Can be set.

  In the process of S1729, the stop symbol notified from the sound lamp control process 113 by the display stop symbol command is set, and the process returns to the variation effect process. Thereby, when the symbol is stopped in S1612 of the variation effect process, the stop symbol set in the process of S1729 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the stop symbol set by the process of S1729 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also for the stop symbol of the pseudo variation display multiple times. For example, when the chance eye is specified by the display stop symbol command, the chance symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the symbol is stopped in S1612 of the variation effect process. A chance symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also for a plurality of pseudo variation display stop symbols.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation effect setting process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the changing effect setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. This variation effect setting process is executed in the variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 (see S1606 in FIG. 30), and as described above, the pseudo variation distribution process (FIG. 31). And the pseudo variation effect effect to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 from the pseudo variation effects distributed in FIG. 32). Moreover, when not distributing to a pseudo | simulation variation | change effect, it is the process which sets the production | presentation aspect of the variation effect decided in the pseudo | simulation variation distribution process (refer FIG.31 and FIG.32).

  In this variation effect process, first, a value added by one from the distribution number counter 233a is substituted into a variable X (S1801), and the contents of the Xth effect register specified by the variable X are substituted into a variable Y (S1802). That is, if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 2, the content of the third effect register 233d is substituted for the variable Y, and if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 1, the content of the second effect register 233c is the variable Y If the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 0, the contents of the first effect register 233b are assigned to the variable Y.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1803). If the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1803: Yes), then the lower 4 of the variable Y It is determined whether or not the bit value is 3 (S1804). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 3 (S1804: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 23H. The “2 second shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode is set (S1805), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the form of “2 seconds shortened special reach variation + 2 seconds re-variation”.

  If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 3 as a result of the processing of S1804 (S1804: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1806). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1806: Yes), the content of the X-th effect register is 22H. The “super reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation” mode is set (S1807), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the form of “2-second shortened super reach variation + 2-second re-variation”.

  If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 2 as a result of the processing of S1806 (S1806: No), it is determined that the content of the Xth effect register is 21H, and a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is obtained. As the production mode, the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second re-variation” mode is set (S1808), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the form of “2-second shortened super reach variation + 2-second re-variation”.

  On the other hand, if the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is not 2 as a result of the processing of S1803 (S1803: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1810). If the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1810: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 4 (S1811). When the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 4 (S1811: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 14H. The “displacement variation with notice effect” mode is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in a “displacement variation with a notice effect” mode.

  If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 4 as a result of the process of S1811 (S1811: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 3 (S1813). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 3 (S1813: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 13H. The “slip effect” mode is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “out-of-shift variation + slip effect” mode.

  If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 3 as a result of the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1815). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1815: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 12H. .5 second extension "mode is set (S1816), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “outside variation + 1.5 second extension” mode.

  If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 2 as a result of the process of S1815 (S1815: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1817). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1817: Yes), the content of the X-th effect register is 11H. The “second extension” mode is set (S1818), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “out-of-shift variation + 1 second extension” mode.

  If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 1 as a result of the processing in S1817 (S1817: No), it is determined that the content of the Xth effect register is 10H, and a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is obtained. As the production mode, the “out-of-range variation” mode is set (S1819), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “out-of-range variation” mode.

  On the other hand, if the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is not 1 as a result of the processing of S1810 (S1803: No), the normal variation effect or pseudo variation according to the contents of the variable Y (that is, the Xth effect register) An effect mode is set (S1820), and the process proceeds to S1809.

  In the process of S1809, the value of the distribution number counter 233a is updated. This update is performed by reducing the value by 1 if the value of the distribution counter 233a is other than 0, and holding the value if the value of the distribution counter 233a is 0. Accordingly, the number of pseudo variation effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the distribution counter is set when the display variation pattern command is received. The pseudo variation effect of the number of times according to the value of 233a can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the value of the distribution number counter 233a is other than 0, the value is decreased by 1, so that the third effect register 233d, the second effect register 233c, and the first effect each time the change effect setting process is executed. According to the order of the register 233b, a pseudo variation effect can be performed in the effect mode of the contents stored in each.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol display device 37 and A variation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. At this time, if the variation effect corresponding to the start winning detected in the past is being executed, the variation effect corresponding to the start winning detected this time is put on hold. In addition, the main controller 110 determines whether the player wins the big win (15R probability variable big hit) which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player as a result of the lottery with respect to the starting winning ball, or even if the player loses. On the other hand, in the case of a reach that impresses that it is one step before the big hit (rear and forward reach), a continuous notice permission flag for permitting the sound lamp control device 113 to give a continuous notice effect to the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed as a hold count command. To be included and sent. In the sound lamp control device 113, if the continuous notice permission flag is on, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  Here, the main control device 110 only makes a continuous notice permission determination based on the result of the lottery for the ball that has won the start, whereas the audio lamp control device 113 makes a continuous notice effect based on the permission determination. Therefore, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing. On the other hand, if the processing capacity MPU 221 is used in the audio lamp control device 113, a variety of presentation modes for the continuous notice effect are set. can do. Even when the lottery result is not only a big hit but also a back and forth reach, the main control device 110 permits the continuous notice effect, and the information is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The execution of the continuous notice effect can be determined even in the case of a back-and-forth out of reach, and the execution of the continuous notice effect can be performed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if a lottery continues as a result of lottery, the player can have a high level of expectation and prevent the player from becoming bored by providing a continuous announcement effect. can do.

  In addition, the continuous notice effect in the present embodiment is set by the sound lamp control device 113 so as to be performed in addition to the change effect within the execution time of the change effect assigned by the main controller 110. It is possible to prevent the execution time of the variable effect from becoming long as the notice effect is executed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the start winning is ignored when there is a start winning when the four varying effects are already held, but in this embodiment, even if the continuous notice effect is executed, the variation is changed. Since the execution time of the production can be kept short, the suspended variation production can be consumed quickly. Therefore, even in a situation where four variation effects are put on hold, the player can continue to hit the ball as it is, so that a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and the player On the other hand, it is possible to continuously execute an effect that gives the player a predetermined sense of expectation while giving a big hit opportunity.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is always set to be a chance of “3”, “4”, and “1”. As a result, the reach variation effect is not performed in the variation effect, and even if the third symbol is not aligned in the two left and right symbol sequences Z1 and Z3 stopped before the middle symbol sequence Z2, the variation effect is stopped. It is possible to give the player an enjoyment that occasional chances are displayed. On the other hand, there are the following problems when performing the continuous notice effect when the variable effect is stopped, such as displaying a chance eye when the variable effect is stopped.

  The determination as to whether or not to allow the start of the continuous notice effect is made based on the values of various counters (see FIG. 14) acquired at that time when a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. If the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the execution of the continuous notice effect (display of chances) is performed for all the variable effects held before the winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. ) Is set. The permission determination of the start of the continuous notice effect does not take into account the effect form of the change effect (whether it is the reach change effect) that was held before the winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. There is a possibility that the effect mode of the change effect for which execution of the effect is set is the reach change effect.

  Here, the reach variation effect stops the variation of the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 prior to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third symbol on the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 has five effective lines L1. Is an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to be aligned on at least one effective line of L5, and when the change of the middle symbol row Z2 stops, three symbols on at least one effective line This is the most basic effect that can give the player a sense of expectation that is a big hit with all the third symbols displayed in the columns Z1 to Z3. The player looks forward to the appearance of this reach variation effect and plays the game.

  Thus, since the reach variation effect is an effect characterized by the stop method of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3, execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variation effect whose effect mode is the reach variation effect. Even if it is, the chance eye cannot be displayed as a stop symbol as it is. Therefore, if the effect mode of the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the reach variation effect, it is possible to give priority to the reach variation effect and not display the chance eye as the stop symbol. When the chances are displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a risk of interrupting the continuity that can be given to the player. On the other hand, in order to display the chance in the reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3” and the right symbol column Z3 is stopped at the symbol “1” during the time allotted to the reach variation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed after being stopped, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1, Z3 are not aligned. Will be given. Further, in the time allotted to the reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol “3”, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol “3”, and the reach symbol is displayed. Before the stop of the row Z2, if the sliding effect is performed by sliding the right symbol row Z3 again and the symbol “1” is displayed in the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, it becomes a very extended production, so the player gets bored.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, a maximum of three pseudo variation effects. As the effect modes of each pseudo variation effect, five types of outlier variation effect modes are determined. As a result, if the deviation variation mode is a stop symbol other than the jackpot symbol, the stop mode can be set freely, so it can be easily set as a chance symbol as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. it can. Therefore, even if any one of the variation patterns instructed by the main controller 110 is instructed, it is possible to surely perform the continuous notice effect, so that the player has a sense of expectation due to the continuous notice effect. Can be made. In addition, by setting the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect as the deviating variation mode, the data of the deviating variation mode prepared for the normal variation effect can be used as it is. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare data for pseudo variation effects, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity necessary for distributing to a plurality of pseudo variation effects.

  In addition, in each pseudo variation effect distributed a plurality of times, a chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol, so that the chance eye can be displayed in a short time interval. Therefore, even if a normal reach variation mode having a long variation time is instructed by the main control device 110 as a variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the player is notified that the chances are continuously displayed. It can be easily noticed, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step each time the chance is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect in the variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the pseudo variation effect is performed up to three times. In addition to distribution, immediately after the reach variation effect is performed, the effect is to perform a re-variation in which all the 3rd symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again so that the contents can be slid in such a manner that the contents can be visually recognized. It can be changed. Then, a chance eye is displayed as a stoppage symbol of re-variation. Thereby, even if the effect mode of the change effect instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach change mode, the continuous notice effect can be easily executed. In addition, even if the continuous notice effect is executed, the change effect can be performed in the reach change mode, so that the player can be satisfied by performing the change effect in the reach change mode that the player is looking forward to. it can.

  In addition, since re-change is performed after the reach-reach symbol is displayed according to the reach variation mode, even if the jackpot symbol is not displayed according to the reach variation mode, the player has a sense of expectation that some kind of effect will be performed. be able to. Then, by displaying the chance chance as the re-variation stop symbol, the continuous notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that becomes a big hit after the subsequent variation effect.

  In addition, the continuous notice effect in the present embodiment performs the same effect that a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol corresponding to each of the variable effects held when the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided. Therefore, every time the same performance is repeatedly performed, a higher sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  Here, the “variation effect (variation display)” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “dynamic display of identification information” described in the claims, and the “continuous notice effect” described in the above embodiments is a request. This corresponds to the “predetermined effect” described in the section. The “3rd symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims, and the “big hit” described in the above embodiments is the “predetermined game value” described in the claims. The “holding number command” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “predetermined command” described in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination on the middle line L2 is “3”, “4”, “1”) as the stop symbol displayed when the variation effect ends. In the above, the case where the so-called “chance eyes” are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable effects to execute the continuous notice effect has been described. The stop order of the rows Z1 to Z3 is not the normal left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, but an order different from normal (for example, the left symbol row Z1 → The continuous notice effect may be performed by continuously stopping in the middle symbol row Z2 → right symbol row Z3, right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 → left symbol row Z1, and the like. Moreover, you may perform a continuous notice effect by stopping all the symbol sequences Z1-Z3 simultaneously over several fluctuation effects. Even if a special notice for a continuous effect is stored in the video RAM 234, and the special symbol is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over a plurality of variable effects, the continuous notice effect is also performed. Good.

  Thereby, normally, when a player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is stopped by a predetermined method different from the usual, or a special symbol is displayed. Thus, if the continuous notice effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed instantaneously. Therefore, a predetermined sense of expectation can be given to the player instantly.

  In addition, among all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, by emitting a stop sound that is emitted from the audio output device 226 when a part or all of the symbol sequences are stopped continuously over a plurality of variation effects, A continuous notice effect may be performed. Here, as a stop sound different from the normal one, a different kind of stop sound may be emitted, or may be emitted with a different volume or pitch. Thus, normally, when the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is generated by “sound” different from the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed. By performing the above, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an effect different from the normal performance has been performed. Therefore, a higher expectation can be given to the player.

  In addition, the continuous notice effect may be executed by controlling the door solenoid 87 by the display control device 114 to open and close the door 87 together with the changing effect. Alternatively, even if the advance notice effect is executed by providing the accessory in the pachinko machine 10 different from the door 87 that operates according to various effects and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Good. Moreover, you may perform a continuous notice effect by making the electrical decoration parts 29-33 of the pachinko machine 10 light or blink together with a change effect by control of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG.

  As a result, each time a variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the accessory such as the door 87 operates in a predetermined manner (for example, opening and closing operation of the door 87). The lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps playing the game by gazing at the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuating effect is performed, but the continuous notice effect is performed by an accessory such as the door 87 and the illumination parts 29 to 33. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that an effect different from normal has been performed. In addition, the continuous notice effect can be easily performed by simple control such as the operation of an accessory such as the door 87 and the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 performs the continuous notice effect by causing the main control device 110 to perform the lottery, the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 to perform the variable effect. Each process can be shared by the control device. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  It should be noted that the chance symbol display in the third symbol display device 81, the change of the symbol sequence stop order, the special symbol display, the operation of the accessory such as the door 87 in a predetermined mode, the voice output from the voice output device 226, and You may perform a continuous notice effect by combining at least 2 or more among lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29-33, and controlling them in conjunction. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is performed by continuously displaying the same chances has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous notice effect is a series of related effects. It may be performed over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying the character displayed when the change effect is stopped in the order of “egg”, “chick”, and “chick” every time the change effect is performed. Thereby, as a series of related effects progresses, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case of allocating from among five types of out-of-variation variation modes has been described in the distribution to a plurality of pseudo variation effects. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a normal “out-of-range variation” mode On the other hand, the “out-of-shift fluctuation + 1.5-second extension + slip effect” mode in which a smooth effect is added to the “out-of-range change + 1.5-second extension” mode in which the high-speed fluctuation time of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is 1.5 seconds long The distribution may be distributed, or the “out-of-track change with a notice effect + slip effect” mode in which a slip effect is added to the “out-of-track change with a notice effect” mode in which a notice effect is performed. In addition, the “outside variation with a notice effect + time extension” mode or the “outside change with a notice effect + time reduction” mode in which the time required for the notice effect in the “outside variation with a notice effect” in which the notice effect is performed is extended or shortened May be assigned, or the “offset change with notice effect + time extension + slip effect” aspect in which a slip effect is further added to the “offset change with notice effect + time extension” aspect may be assigned. Furthermore, the “out-of-run fluctuation + time reduction” mode in which the high-speed fluctuation time of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is shortened as compared with the normal “out-of-run fluctuation” mode may be distributed. By appropriately allocating from these effects modes, it is possible to distribute pseudo variation effects without changing the time required for the variation effects with respect to the variation effects in the variation pattern instructed by the main controller 110. The number of pseudo variation effects in one variation effect can be kept low.

  In the embodiment described above, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in a mode in which a slip effect is added to a predetermined effect mode, a high probability or a chance chance is displayed as a stop pattern. It may be set to be. For example, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in the “out-of-shift variation + slip effect” mode, a high probability or a chance chance is displayed as the stop pattern. By performing the slip effect after the player recognizes that it is out of the “out-of-run fluctuation” mode, it is possible to give the player a high expectation that a chance will be displayed. In addition, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in the “reach variation + slip effect” mode, if the stop symbol is displayed with a high probability or a chance chance, After giving the player a sense of expectation through the “reach fluctuation” mode, after the player recognizes that it has been disapproved, the slip effect is performed, and the player has a high expectation that the chance will be displayed. Can be given again. Further, in these cases, by performing the slip effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the chances are continuously displayed.

  On the other hand, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in a state in which a slip effect is added to a predetermined effect mode, a stop pattern is displayed with a high probability or always other than a chance eye. You may set as follows. For example, if the “slip effect” is performed after the “outside variation” mode, if the stop symbol is displayed with a high probability or other than the chance eye, the “outside variation” mode is displayed after the “outside variation” mode. When the “slip effect” is performed, it is possible to cause the player to predict that the chance is not displayed. In addition, for example, when a “slip effect” is performed after the “reach variation” mode, if the chance pattern is displayed with a high probability as the stop pattern, or the “reach variation” mode, When the “slip effect” is performed later, the player can have a higher expectation for the slip effect. In addition, when the variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is distributed to the pseudo variation effect, the “predetermined effect + slip effect” aspect in which a display other than the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol is the pseudo variation. You may make it not select as an effect mode of an effect.

  In addition, when the effect mode in the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set is a mode in which the slip effect is added to the predetermined effect mode, it always stops with a high probability. In a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in which a stop symbol is set so that a symbol other than the chance is displayed as a symbol and execution of the continuous notice effect is set, a slip effect is added to a predetermined effect mode In that case, the stop symbol may be set so that the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol with a high probability or without fail. As a result, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in a mode in which a slip effect is added to a predetermined effect mode, if a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol, a continuous notice effect is performed. Can be easily recognized by the player.

  In the embodiment described above, according to the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 27), based on the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed from the main controller 110, the distribution to the pseudo variation effect and the pseudo variation effect are performed. Although the description has been given of the case where the production mode is set and the display variation pattern command is set accordingly, this process stores a table in which the variation time by the variation pattern is associated with the display variation pattern command in the ROM 222. By referring to this table, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed from the main controller 110 may be set, or software processing may be performed without using the table. May be performed. When setting a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed from the main controller 110 with reference to the table, the setting process can be performed easily and appropriately. In addition, when a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed from the main controller 110 is set by software processing, a table is not necessary, so that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is “1” (see S1101 in FIG. 25), and a predetermined condition (conditions 1 to condition described above). 3) is satisfied (see S1105 to S1110 in FIG. 25), the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see S1114 and S1115 in FIG. 25). It is not something that can be done. For example, when the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is “1”, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see S1114 and S1115 in FIG. 25). After that, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied. Also, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, the value of the hold number counter 223a is set in the continuous notice number counter 223c (see S1116 in FIG. 25), and the hold indicated by the hold number command received this time After the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for all of the held balls held before the ball, it is confirmed whether or not the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, and if neither condition is satisfied The start determination of the continuous notice effect may be rejected by returning the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c to the value before the setting and deleting the execution setting of the continuous notice effect. In this case, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability and the value of the holding number counter 223a is set in the continuous notice number counter 223c, the continuous notice number counter 223c before the value of the holding number counter 223a is set. And the value of the state flag 223d after continuous notice are saved in the RAM 223, and if any of the above conditions 1 to 3 is not satisfied, the value saved in the RAM 223 is saved as the continuous notice number counter 223c and By resetting the state flag after continuous notice 223d, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c and the state flag after continuous notice 223d may be returned to the values before the setting, and the execution setting of the continuous notice effect may be deleted. . Thereby, when none of the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the setting of continuous notice effect execution.

  In the above embodiment, in the above (Condition 2), the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of holds included in the hold number command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. )), There is one requirement that there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the maximum number of holding times is large (for example, 8 ), The fluctuation that should exist between the fluctuation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of times of holding included in the number-of-holds command and the last fluctuation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. The number of effects (holding balls) may be increased (for example, 4 or more). As a result, a lot of variation effects (holding balls) between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of times of holding included in the number-of-holds command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. If there is no ball), the start of the continuous notice effect is not determined, and as a result, the number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is continuously performed can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, in the main controller 110, when the result of determination based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning is a jackpot and the display mode is the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), and When the result of determination based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning is out and the display mode is out-of-front reach, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “1”. ”Is described, and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified of permission to start the continuous notice effect (see S605 to S609 in FIG. 20). The condition for setting “1” to “1” may be set as appropriate in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 10. For example, based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of winning the start, the mode of variation effect (“special reach variation effect”, “super reach variation effect”, “normal reach variation effect”, “out-of-range variation effect”, etc. In addition, the start of the continuous notice effect may be determined and the continuous notice permission flag may be set according to the appearance mode such as “rear out of front / rear reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, and “complete out”. . In addition, the continuous notice permission flag may be set to “1” when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning is a random value that is a big hit, and the continuous notice permission is permitted when it is out of place. The flag may be set to “0”. In this case, if the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, it is suggested to the player that the final change effect that has been put on hold will be a big hit. Can do. Therefore, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  Also, if the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning is a big winning value, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the big winning type Depending on (first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), time bonus), the effect of the continuous notice effect (for example, background color, combination of symbols used for chances) , And the like, which are distributed as a pseudo variation effect, etc.). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot corresponding to the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is generated. In this case, the holding number command includes the jackpot type (first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), short-term jackpot) that occurs after the end of the continuous notice, If transmission is performed from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 can switch the effect mode of the continuous notice effect according to the jackpot type.

  Further, it is possible to determine the permission of the start of the continuous notice effect according to the number of variable effects held at the time of starting winning (number of times of hold), and set the continuous notice permission flag. Thereby, for example, the probability of permitting the start of the continuous notice effect when the number of times of the hold is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, or allowing the start of the continuous notice effect when the number of times of the hold is large, If it is higher than the probability of permitting the start of the production, there is a high possibility that the continuous notice production is continuously performed over a predetermined number or more of the fluctuation productions. As a result, the player can recognize that an effect different from the normal effect has been performed by continuously performing the continuous notice effect over a predetermined number or more of the variable effects. Can give you a sense of expectation. Furthermore, the result of the determination based on the values of the various counters acquired at the time of starting winning, the effect mode of the variation effect selected based on the values of the various counters acquired at the time of starting winning, and the fluctuations that are held at the time of starting winning The continuous notice permission flag may be set by determining permission to start the continuous notice effect by combining any two or more of the number of effects (the number of holdings).

  In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the main control device 110 permits the start of the continuous notice effect (see S605 to S610 in FIG. 20), and when the start of the continuous notice effect is permitted (the first byte of the upper byte). When the bit (when the continuous notice permission flag) is set to “1”, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect according to the continuous notice determination probability set by the continuous notice determination table 222a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous notice determination table may be stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the main controller 110 may determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. . In this case, the main control device 110 may instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to execute the continuous notice effect using the hold count command or a command different from the hold count command. .

  In addition, a determination result (big hit, miss) determined by the main controller 110 based on the values of various counters acquired when the ball is won by starting or following the hold number command, If the judgment result is a big hit, it is a hit type (the first probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit), the second probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit), and a short time big hit), and if the judgment result is out, the final stop pattern (goes back and forth) At least one of reach, reach other than front and rear, and complete reach) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 starts continuous notice production based on such information. A determination of permission or determination of whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect may be made. Alternatively, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 when the ball is won for starting is determined by the main control by the hold count command or following the hold count command. It may be transmitted from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 may make all the determinations of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. In these cases, the main control device 113 does not determine whether or not to allow the continuous notice effect to start and whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, so the processing load on the main control device 113 can be further reduced and the start prize is won. It is possible to prevent a delay or malfunction of the lottery process performed on the ball. In particular, in the latter case, it is not necessary to determine the big hit or miss based on the values of the various counters acquired when the ball is won for start, separately from the lottery process, that is, the first random number counter C1. And a plurality of jackpot random numbers stored in the jackpot random number table need not be compared, the processing load on the main controller 113 can be reliably reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the permission of the start of the continuous notice effect determined by the main control device 110 in the timer interrupt process in which the start detection is performed is indicated by the first bit (continuous notice permission flag of the upper byte of the hold count command). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a continuous notice permission command for notifying permission to start a continuous notice effect may be transmitted following the hold number command. . In the above embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the 0th bit (the gaming state flag after the continuous notice) of the number-of-holds command (whether it is a big hit or missed) May be included in the continuous notice permission command and transmitted. In these cases, only when the main control device 110 determines to permit the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice permission command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 following the hold count command, or the continuous notice is given. The permission command may be configured to notify whether or not the start of the continuous notice effect is permitted, and the continuous notice permission command may always be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 following the hold count command.

  In the embodiment described above, different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit”, “out”) and the number of variable effects held on the main control device 110. Although the case where the continuous notice determination probability is changed using the continuous notice determination table 222a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect ("big hit", "losing") The continuous notice determination probability may be changed using a continuous notice determination table in which different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with each other depending on only one of the number of changes and the number of fluctuating effects held in main controller 110. . In addition, when associating different continuous notice determination ranges according to the number of hold times, the number of hold times may be divided into several groups, and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. In this case, the continuous notice determination range may not be set and the start of the continuous notice effect may not be determined. In the latter case, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect is continuously performed together with the fluctuating effect more than a predetermined number of times. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed by continuously performing the continuous notice effect for a predetermined number of times or more. A sense of expectation can be given.

  In addition, variation modes (“special reach variation production”, “super reach variation production”, “normal reach variation production”, “outside fluctuation production”, “out-of-front reach”, “other than back-and-forth out” The continuous notice determination probability may be changed using a continuous notice determination table in which different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with each other in accordance with the “reach” and “completely off” effects. A combination of at least one of the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect and the number of suspensions of the variable effect held in the main control device 110, or a continuous associated with different continuous notice determination probabilities according to these three combinations You may change a continuous notice determination probability using a notice judgment table.

  Thus, for example, if the continuous notice determination range is associated with each production mode so that the continuous notice determination probability increases in the order of outlier change effect, normal reach change effect, super reach change effect, and special reach change, it is put on hold. If a continuous notice effect is performed together with all the change effects, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the effect form of the last change effect held is a super reach change effect or a special reach change effect. can do. Here, the normal reach fluctuation production, the super reach fluctuation production, and the special reach fluctuation may be a combination of predetermined symbols when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped (stopped), that is, jackpot It is an aspect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the special reach variation effect is more than the super reach variation aspect, and the super reach variation effect is more to the player than the normal reach variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation when the continuous notice effect is continuously performed together with all the pending change effects. .

  Moreover, the production mode of the variation production may be divided into several groups, and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. For example, it is possible to divide into a variation variation effect and a reach variation effect including a normal reach variation effect, a super reach variation effect, and a special reach variation effect, and to associate different continuous notice determination ranges. In addition, the continuous notice determination range may not be set for some effects, and the start of the continuous notice effect may not be determined. For example, the start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only in the case of reach fluctuation effects such as a normal reach change effect, a super reach change effect, and a special reach change effect without setting the continuous notice determination range for the off-change effect. Good. In this case, if the continuous notice effect is executed, it is ensured to the player that the effect mode of the last change effect that has been suspended is, for example, a normal reach change effect, a super reach change effect, or a special reach change effect. Can be suggested. Therefore, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  On the other hand, in the above embodiment, the continuous notice determination table describes the case where different consecutive notice determination ranges are associated with the two states of “big hit” and “out” as the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect. It is not limited to this. For example, each of the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), "second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)", "time / temporal jackpot", and "out" are associated with different continuous notice determination ranges. May be. Further, these states may be divided into several groups, and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. As a result, for example, the probability of consecutive notice determination increases in the order of “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)”, “second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)”, “time / temporal jackpot”, and “out”. If the continuous notice determination range is associated with each gaming state, when the continuous notice effect is continuously performed together with all the change effects that have been held, after the last change effect that has been put on hold, It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player. In this modification, the main control device 110 determines whether or not the continuous notice start is started, or the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not the continuous notice effect start is permitted, and the audio lamp control device 113 directly starts the continuous notice. In the case where the presence / absence is determined, if the result of the lottery in the main control device 110 is “hit”, it is useful in determining permission to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete disengagement). Although the case where it is set by the device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been put on hold is determined. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear detach reach mode. In this case, when the continuous notice number counter 223c is 1, it may be determined as the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Then, in the variation display processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, in the processing (S1207) of setting the variation effect stop symbol, the variation effect stop symbol is out and the continuous notice counter It is determined whether or not the value of 223c is 1 (that is, the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed), and as a result, the stop pattern of the change effect is out and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c. If is 1, in the processing of S1207, the stop symbol corresponding to the back-and-forth losing reach may be set as the stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the situation where the execution of the effect is decided, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed. In particular, in the second embodiment, even when such an image is displayed instead of high-speed fluctuation, when reducing the time required for the fluctuation effect to perform the continuous notice effect, If the image corresponding to the shortening time is removed from the noise-like image, it is possible to easily prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the variation effect caused by removing the image.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one game entrance 13 is provided on the game board 13 where a lottery lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be provided in the game board 13 where entrances are detected independently and a big winning lottery is started. In this case, information indicating which of the first entrances is on hold is included in the hold count command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance. May be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a hold number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a hold number command is received, the hold for the first entrance indicated by the hold number command is held. When the number of holds is set in the number counter and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of hold times for the first entrance indicated by the change pattern command is decremented by 1, the number of holds is counted for each first entrance. can do.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the continuous notice counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is set to the maximum number of reservations that can be held by all the first entrances (that is, each With respect to the fluctuating effect (holding ball) for the number of times obtained by adding the maximum number of holdings that can be held by the first entrance, the presence / absence of continuous notice effect execution in each holding ball is set. Also good. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command and determines to start the continuous notice effect, the number of hold times of the fluctuating effect (hold ball) held by all the first entrances at that time. Is calculated by adding the values of all the number-of-holds counters corresponding to the respective first entrances, and with respect to the continuous notice number counter 223c, it is held at all the first entrances before the current stop-off ball. What is necessary is just to set the number of held balls (that is, the number obtained by adding the number of times of holding of each first entrance at the present time). Thereby, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect can be executed over the fluctuating effects held by all the first entrances.

  Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the hold count counter 223a is decreased by 1 (see S1211 in FIG. 26). It is not limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the hold count counter of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S306). A hold count command is set so that the value 203N (see S304 in FIG. 17) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the hold count command is a variable pattern command transmission. And may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the hold count command may be generated so that the continuous notice permission flag and the game state flag after continuous notice of the hold count command are both “0”. In this case, the process of S1211 in FIG. 26 is omitted.

  In the above embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command and determines the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects that have been held at that time. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in each individual variable effect. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110 is updated every time the variable display process (FIG. 26) is executed, and a counter is provided for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. Also good. In the variation display process, when the variation start flag is on, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223c is 2 or more and the value of the counter is a predetermined value, the corresponding variation effect is displayed. The continuous notice effect execution may be set. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the hold counter 223a when determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the contents of the effect mode of the change effect to be determined (super reach change effect, normal reach change effect, An effect mode such as an out-of-shift effect, and in the case of an error, an effect mode such as an out-of-front reach, a reach other than out-of-front / out, a complete out-going), a gaming state after the end of a series of continuous notice effects (a big hit, a miss), or these 2 Combinations of the above are mentioned. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 controls the door solenoid 87a that opens and closes the door 87 has been described. It may be connected to the output port 225 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In this case, the continuous notice determination table shown in FIG. 7 is provided in the program ROM 232 of the display control device 114, and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided in the RAM 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above embodiment. There may be provided a holding number counter, a continuous notice determination counter, a continuous notice number counter, a continuous notice state flag, a continuous notice mode flag, and an effect mode counter having the same functions as those described above. When the main control device 110 is notified of the start permission of the continuous notice effect by the hold count command or the continuous notice command, the display control device 114 performs the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 25 to start the continuous notice effect. You may decide. In addition, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process, the change pattern command for instructing the start of the change effect and the change pattern is mainly used for the change effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. When transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 performs a plurality of pseudo fluctuations according to FIG. 9 based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the effect mode counter. After allocating to the effects, control may be performed so that the pseudo variation effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The sound lamp control device may be connected to the display control device and may be configured to transmit a command for outputting each sound and lighting the lamp from the display control device to the sound lamp control device.

  Further, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one sub-control device. When the sub-control device is notified of the start permission of the continuous notice effect by the main controller 110 by the hold count command or the continuous notice command, the sub-control device performs the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined. In addition, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process, the change pattern command for instructing the start of the change effect and the change pattern is mainly used for the change effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. When transmitted from the control device 110 to the sub-control device, the change time indicated by the change pattern command and the value of the effect mode counter are not generated without generating the display change pattern command by the continuous notice setting process shown in FIG. Based on the above, it is possible to perform control so that the pseudo variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after being divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects according to FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the passage through the second entrance 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of holds is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is different for the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or by dividing the number of four divided areas by the number of times of the hold. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding times is notified by the light emitting member. You may do it.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from this embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown.

  Identification based on detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition, acquisition means for obtaining random information when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means, and information obtained by the acquisition means A main control means having a selection means for selecting a first effect mode that is a dynamic display of information, and the first effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. Sub-control means having first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the mode, and a combination of identification information predetermined in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means is present. A game machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when issued, wherein the main control means determines whether to perform a second effect different from the first effect; Means and judgment When it is determined that the second effect is to be performed, the permission transmitting unit transmits a permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit includes: Based on receiving a permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means and a storage means for storing the number of standby times of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, In each of the first effects for the number of standby times, setting means for setting the second effect to be executable in addition to the first effect within the time allotted to the execution of the first effect. And a second effect executing means for executing the second effect when the first effect to which the second effect is added by the setting means is executed by the first effect executing means. Features The gaming machine 1.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the first control mode is selected by the selection unit in the main control unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit when the detection unit detects the establishment of the start condition. Then, in the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect execution means as the first effect in the selected mode. Further, in the main control means, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect different from the first effect. As a result, when it is determined that the second effect is to be performed, the second control is performed. The permission command for permitting execution of the effect is transmitted to the sub-control means by the permission transmission means of the main control means. On the other hand, when the establishment of the start condition is detected in the main control means, the first effect corresponding to the establishment of the start condition detected in the past is being executed by the first effect execution means of the sub control means The first effect corresponding to the establishment of the detected start condition this time is on standby, and the number of standby times is stored in the storage means provided in the sub-control means. Then, when the sub-control means receives the permission command transmitted from the main control means, it is assigned to the execution of the first effect in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. In the same time, the first effect is set by the setting means of the sub-control means so that the second effect can be executed in addition to the first effect, and the first effect to which the second effect is added is the first effect. When executed by the effect executing means, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.

  Thereby, for example, when it is determined that a transition to the gaming state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is performed based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit when the start condition is established, the determination unit of the main control unit If it is determined that the second effect is to be performed by the sub-control unit, each time the first effect that was on standby when the start condition is satisfied is executed by the first effect execution unit, In addition to the first effect, the second effect can be executed by the second effect executing means. Therefore, if the second effect is continuously executed together with the first effect, after all the first effects that have been waiting have been completed, the gaming state of the gaming machine is indicated to the player to the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to transition to a gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value.

  In addition, the second effect is not performed by rewriting the aspect of the first effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, but within the time allotted to the execution of the first effect. Since it is set to be executable in addition to the effect, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the first effect from becoming longer as the second effect is executed. Thus, for example, when the maximum number of standby times for the first effect is determined and the start condition is satisfied at a stage where the first effect for the maximum number of standby times is satisfied, the establishment of the start condition is ignored. Even if it is a thing, since the number of times of waiting is consumed early by suppressing the execution time of the first effect to be short, even in the situation having the first effect for the maximum number of times of waiting for the player Thus, the ball can be continuously driven. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute an effect that gives the player a predetermined sense of expectation while suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine and giving the player an opportunity to transition to an advantageous gaming state. be able to.

  Also, in general gaming machines, the lottery for determining whether or not to give a predetermined gaming value to a player is performed by the main control of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to prevent a lottery processing delay or malfunction, It is required to reduce the processing load related to control. On the other hand, the main control means determines whether or not to perform the second effect, and when determining that the second effect is to be performed, transmits a permission command for permitting the execution to the sub-control means. Since only the processing is performed, the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, if an arithmetic processing unit with high processing capability is used as the sub-control means, even if the processing load related to the execution of the second effect is high, the second effect can be easily used as the second effect execution means. It can be executed against. In this way, by transmitting a permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect from the main control means to the sub-control means, the main control means is caused to execute a process with a low processing load, and a process with a high processing load is performed. By causing the sub-control means to execute, the second effect can be easily executed. Further, if the determination result by the acquisition means of the main control means and the first effect mode selected by the selection means are transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means together with the permission command, the setting means of the sub control means A wide variety of modes of the second effect added in the game can be set, and various expectations can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine 1, the determination means determines whether to perform the second effect based on random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. A gaming machine 2 characterized by making a determination.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the determination unit determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the random information acquired by the acquisition unit when the detection unit detects the establishment of the start condition. Thus, for example, when it is determined that a transition to the gaming state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is performed based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, the determination unit determines that the second effect is performed. For example, if the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting when the start condition is satisfied, the gaming state of the gaming machine is changed to the game after the last first effect that has been waiting. It is possible to suggest to the player that the player is transitioned to a gaming state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the gaming state of the gaming machine transitions to a gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value.

  In the gaming machine 2, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the aspect of the first effect selected by the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine 3 characterized in that

  In addition, the aspect of the 1st production selected by the selection means is that in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is the predetermined identification. It includes an expected mode (reach mode) that constitutes a part of a combination of information and a normal mode (completely off mode) that displays a display result other than a predetermined combination of identification information without the expected mode. There may be. In addition, after a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display according to the expected mode, the remaining identification information is other than the combination of the predetermined identification information and the identification information highly related to the predetermined identification information ( For example, when the identification information is represented by a number, a first losing expectation mode (an anteroposterior leaching mode) in which a numerical value indicated by a predetermined identification information and an identifying information indicating a preceding and following value stop, or a dynamic depending on an expectation mode A second failure expectation mode in which, after a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the display, the remaining identification information is other than a predetermined combination of identification information and the identification information having low relevance to the predetermined identification information is stopped. It may include (reach mode other than front / rear deviation).

  According to the gaming machine 3, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the aspect of the first effect selected by the selection means. Thereby, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, it is determined that the aspect of the last first effect that has been waiting is a predetermined aspect. Since it can be suggested to the player, the player can be expected to perform the first performance in a predetermined manner.

  In the gaming machine 3, the aspect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means is that in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped during the dynamic display. The stopped identification information includes an expected aspect that constitutes a part of the predetermined combination of identification information, and the determination means performs dynamic display in which the first effect selected by the selection means is the expected aspect. The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that it is determined that the second performance is to be performed on the condition that it is one of the conditions.

  According to the gaming machine 4, as a first effect mode executed by the first effect executing means, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display. If the identified identification information includes an expected form that forms part of a predetermined combination of identification information, one condition is that the first effect selected by the selection means is a dynamic display in the expected form. When the second effect is performed, it is determined by the determining means. Accordingly, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the player is informed that the last aspect of the first effect that has been waiting is the expected aspect. Can be suggested. Here, the expected mode is that there is a possibility that a combination of identification information determined in advance when all the identification information is stopped, that is, a game in which the gaming state of the gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player. This is a mode that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of transition to a state. Therefore, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, it is possible to give a high sense of expectation to the player.

  The “normal reach fluctuation effect”, “super reach fluctuation effect”, and “special reach fluctuation effect” described in the above embodiments correspond to the “expectation mode”.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the number of standby times of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. A gaming machine 5 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine 5, whether or not to perform the second effect is determined by the determining unit based on the number of standby times of the first effect executed by the first effect executing unit. Here, the second effects are performed in correspondence with the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage unit. Therefore, for example, it is determined that the second effect is performed when the number of standby times of the first effect is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, or the second effect is determined when the number of standby times of the first effect is large. If the probability is higher than the probability of determining that the second effect is to be performed when the number of standby times of the first effect is small, the possibility that the second effect will be continuously performed a predetermined number of times or more increases. . Thereby, the player can recognize that an effect different from the normal effect has been performed by continuously performing the second effect a predetermined number of times or more. Can give you a sense of expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 5, when the setting unit receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission unit, the setting unit stores the number of waiting times stored in the storage unit based on a predetermined condition. In each of the first effects, in addition to the first effect, the second effect is set so as to be executable.

  The predetermined condition may be determined based on random information acquired by the acquisition unit when the detection unit detects the establishment of the start condition. For example, based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, the second effect is added to the first effect on condition that it is determined that a transition to a gaming state that gives a player a predetermined game value is performed. It may be set to be executable. In addition, the predetermined condition may be determined based on a first effect aspect selected by the selection unit based on information acquired by the acquisition unit. For example, as a first effect aspect, in the dynamic display of identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is a part of the combination of the predetermined identification information. If the first aspect selected by the selection means is the expected aspect, the second effect is set to be executable in addition to the first effect. May be. In these cases, the contents relating to the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the contents relating to the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means are combined with the permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect. May be notified to the sub-control means. In this case, these contents may be notified by being included in the permission command, or may be notified using a command different from the permission command.

  Further, the predetermined condition may be determined based on the number of standby times of the first effect stored in the storage unit. For example, the second effect may be set to be executable in addition to the first effect on condition that the number of standby times of the first effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Furthermore, the predetermined condition may be determined by a combination of these conditions, or may be indicated with a predetermined probability.

  According to the gaming machine 6, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit is received, the first production corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage unit is received based on a predetermined condition. The setting means sets so that the second effect is performed in addition to the first effect. Thereby, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, it is possible to suggest that the predetermined condition is satisfied for the player. It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation for a predetermined condition. The setting means is provided in the sub-control means, and various conditions can be set as the predetermined condition if an arithmetic processing unit having a high processing capability is used as the sub-control means. Therefore, since the execution of the second effect can be set under various conditions, the player can have various expectations.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, when the setting means receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means, the setting means sets the second effect to be executable with a predetermined probability. A gaming machine comprising: first changing means for changing the predetermined probability in accordance with the number of standby times stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the second effect is set by the setting unit so as to be executable at a predetermined probability of being changed by the first changing unit in accordance with the number of standby times stored in the storage unit. Here, since the second effect is performed in correspondence with the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means, for example, if the predetermined probability is set higher as the number of standby times is larger, When the effect is set to be executable, there is a high possibility that the number of consecutive times of the second effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that an effect different from the normal effect has been performed by continuously performing the second effect, so that the player has a special sense of expectation. Can be given. In addition, since the number of standby times of the first effect generally takes a small value, if the predetermined number of times is set higher as the number of standby times is larger, the second frequently occurs when the number of standby times is small. On the other hand, when the number of standbys increases, the second effect can be easily performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, the setting means sets the second effect to be executable with a predetermined probability when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means is received. A gaming machine (8) comprising second changing means for changing the predetermined probability based on random information acquired by the acquiring means when the detection means detects establishment of the start condition.

  In this case, the content related to the random information acquired by the acquisition unit may be notified from the main control unit to the sub control unit together with the permission command permitting the execution of the second effect. At this time, the content related to the random information acquired by the acquisition unit may be included in the permission command to be notified, or may be notified using a command different from the permission command.

  According to the gaming machine 8, the second effect is executed with a predetermined probability of being changed by the second changing unit based on the random information acquired by the acquiring unit when the detection unit detects the establishment of the start condition. It is set by the setting means as possible. Thus, for example, based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, a predetermined probability is given when it is determined that a transition to a gaming state that gives a player a predetermined gaming value is given, and a predetermined gaming machine value is given. If it is larger than a predetermined probability when it is determined that the transition to the gaming state is not performed, the standby is performed when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting. It is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming state of the gaming machine is likely to transition to a gaming state that gives the player a predetermined gaming value after the last first production that has been performed. . Therefore, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  Moreover, generally, the proportion determined to make a transition to a gaming state that gives a player a predetermined gaming value based on random information acquired by the acquiring means is set to be small. On the other hand, based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means, the predetermined probability when it is determined to make a transition to a gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player is the predetermined gaming machine value. Frequently when it is determined not to make a transition to a gaming state that gives a player a predetermined gaming value if it is greater than a predetermined probability when it is determined not to make a transition to the gaming state to be granted In the meantime, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being performed, and when it is determined that the game state is to be given a predetermined game value to the player, the second effect is likely to be performed. can do.

  In the gaming machine 8, the second changing means changes the predetermined probability according to the aspect of the first effect selected by the selecting means based on random information acquired by the acquiring means. A gaming machine 9 characterized by

  In addition, the aspect of the first effect is, for example, in the dynamic display of identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display and the stopped identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information. A so-called “normal reach” mode, which is a part of an expected mode, and a so-called “complete out” mode, which is a normal mode for displaying a display result other than a combination of predetermined identification information without the expected mode. In addition, although the probability of being selected is lower than the above-described expected mode, the lottery result shows a combination of identification information predetermined in the first performance. It may include a so-called “super reach” mode or “special reach” mode, which is a special expected mode in which the probability of being selected in some cases is high.

  According to the gaming machine 9, the second effect is set by the setting unit so as to be executable with a predetermined probability of being changed by the second changing unit in accordance with the mode of the first effect selected by the selecting unit. Thereby, for example, in the first presentation aspect selected by the selection unit, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is previously stored. When it is a normal mode in which a display result other than a predetermined combination of identification information is displayed without the expected mode, with a predetermined probability in the case of an expected mode constituting a part of the combination of defined identification information If the second effect is performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the mode of the last first effect that has been waiting is the expected mode. It can be suggested to the player that the possibility is high. Here, the expected mode is that there is a possibility that a combination of identification information determined in advance when all the identification information is stopped, that is, a game in which the gaming state of the gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player. This is a mode that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of transition to a state. Therefore, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 9, the second effect is a series of related effects corresponding to the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. A gaming machine 10 that is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 10, the second effect is a series of related effects corresponding to each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. Each time a series of related effects progresses, the player can have a higher sense of expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 9, the second effect is to perform the same effect in correspondence with each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. A gaming machine 11 characterized.

  According to the gaming machine 11, the second effect is to perform the same effect corresponding to each first effect corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. Each time it is played, a higher expectation can be given to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 11, the setting means receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means, and the first effect corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. In each case, the second effect is set to be executable in accordance with the stop of the first effect, and the second effect executing means is configured to add the second effect by the setting means. The gaming machine 12, wherein when the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect is executed in accordance with the stop of the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine 12, when the sub-control means receives the permission command transmitted from the main control means, the first effect in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means. It is set by the setting means of the sub-control means so that the second effect can be executed in accordance with the stop. And when the 1st effect to which the 2nd effect was added is performed by the 1st effect execution means, the 2nd effect is performed by the 2nd effect execution means according to the stop of the 1st effect. The As a result, the combination of identification information that appears when the first effect is stopped is a combination other than the predetermined combination of identification information, and even if the predetermined game value is not given, the second effect As a result, the player can have a predetermined sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that does not get the player bored.

  In the gaming machine 12, the second effect executing means executes the second effect by stopping the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means by a predetermined method. A gaming machine 13 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine 13, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means by stopping the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means by a predetermined method. Here, the predetermined method may be a method of stopping the dynamically displayed identification information in an order different from the normal stop order, or a method of stopping all the identification information at the same time. Normally, when a player plays a game while paying attention to the dynamic display of the identification information, if the second presentation is executed by stopping the identification information by a predetermined method different from normal, Thus, it can be instantly recognized that the second performance has been performed. Therefore, a predetermined sense of expectation can be given to the player instantly.

  In the gaming machine 12 or 13, the second effect executing means emits a predetermined stop sound when the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means stops. A gaming machine 14 characterized in that an effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine 14, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means by generating a predetermined stop sound when the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means stops. The Here, the predetermined stop sound may emit a stop sound of a different type from the stop sound normally emitted when the dynamically displayed identification information stops, or the normally generated stop sound. The stop sound may be emitted at a different volume or pitch. Normally, when a player plays a game while paying attention to the dynamic display of identification information, the player performs the second effect with a “sound” that is different from the dynamic display of the identification information. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that an effect different from the normal performance has been performed. Therefore, a higher expectation can be given to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines 12 to 14, the second effect executing means causes the predetermined combination of identification information to appear after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped. The gaming machine 15 is characterized in that the second effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine 15, after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped, the second effect executing means generates the second effect by causing the predetermined combination of identification information to appear. Executed. Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the dynamic display of the identification information, so by performing the second effect using the identification information that appears after the stop of the dynamic display, Thus, it can be easily recognized that the second performance has been performed. In addition, after stopping the dynamic display of the identification information, the predetermined combination of identification information does not appear, and even when the predetermined game value is not given, the predetermined combination of identification information is displayed. The player can have a predetermined sense of expectation, and can be motivated to continue the game. Note that the “chance” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “predetermined combination of identification information”.

  In any one of the gaming machines 12 to 15, the sub-control unit is detected by the mode detection unit that detects the mode of the first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting unit, and the mode detection unit. In addition, when the aspect of the first effect is a predetermined effect mode, the first information is displayed so that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed a plurality of times during the time allotted to the first effect. And a second effect executing unit that executes the first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting unit and is executed by the first effect executing unit. When the second effect is executed in accordance with the stop of the first effect and the aspect of the first effect is changed by the aspect changing means, the dynamic information of the identification information is stopped. Every time you stop Gaming machine A1, wherein is intended to perform a second effect.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first effect mode in which the second effect is added by the setting unit is detected by the mode detection unit, and the detected first effect mode is the predetermined effect mode. The mode of the first effect is changed so that the dynamic display of the identification information executed in the first effect is performed a plurality of times during the time allocated to the first effect by the mode changing means. Is done. And when the aspect of a 1st effect is changed by the aspect change means, whenever the dynamic display of identification information is stopped by the 2nd effect execution means, a 2nd effect is performed according to the stop. Is done. Thereby, for example, when the predetermined effect mode is a long time for the effect, the first effect is distributed to the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times, and in accordance with the stop of each dynamic display. By performing the second effect, the second effect can be performed at short time intervals. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the second presentation is being performed continuously, and each time the second presentation is performed, the player's expectations are gradually increased. Can be increased. In addition, the aspect of the first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting unit is selected in advance by the selecting unit before the second effect is added. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in a predetermined manner. When performing the second effect by stopping in the stop mode, even if the mode of the first effect selected in advance by the selection unit is an effect mode in which the dynamic display of the identification information cannot be stopped in the predetermined stop mode. If the first aspect is assigned to the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times, and each dynamic display is stopped in the predetermined stop mode, the second aspect can be easily obtained. You can add production. Therefore, even if an arbitrary effect mode is selected as the first effect, the second effect can be surely performed, so that the player can be sure to have a sense of expectation due to the second effect. Can do.

  In the gaming machine A1, the aspect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means is that in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped during the dynamic display. The stopped identification information includes an expected aspect that constitutes a part of the predetermined combination of identification information, and the aspect changing means is configured such that the aspect of the first effect detected by the aspect detecting means is If it is the period aspect, the aspect of the first effect is changed so that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed a plurality of times during the time allotted to the first effect. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, as a first effect mode executed by the first effect executing means, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display and the stop is performed. If the identified identification information includes an expected aspect that constitutes a part of a predetermined combination of identification information, if the first effect aspect detected by the aspect detection means is the expected aspect, the aspect change means first The aspect of the first effect is changed so that the dynamic display of the identification information executed in the first effect is performed a plurality of times during the time allotted to the effect. Here, the expected mode is that there is a possibility that a combination of identification information determined in advance when all the identification information is stopped, that is, a game in which the gaming state of the gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player. Since this is a mode that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of transition to a state, in order to maintain the player's expectation for a long time, generally, the time required for the production is set to be long. However, when the first effect to which the second effect is added is the expected mode, the first effect is distributed to the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times, and the respective dynamic display is stopped. Since the second effect is performed, the second effect can be performed at short time intervals. Therefore, even if the second effect is added to the first effect selected by the selecting means in the expectation mode having a long time required for the effect, the second effect is continuously performed. Can be easily noticed, and the player can gradually increase the sense of expectation every time the second performance is performed. In addition, as described above, in the stop mode of the first effect according to the expected mode, a part of the identification information is stopped so as to constitute a part of the combination of the predetermined identification information during the dynamic display. After that, since it is a special mode for retaining the remaining identification information, when performing the second effect by stopping the dynamic display of the identification information in a predetermined stop mode, Where there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the identification information cannot be stopped in a predetermined stop mode, according to the gaming machine A2, the first effect according to the expected mode is distributed to the dynamic display of the identification information multiple times. If each displayed dynamic display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode, the second effect can be easily added to the first effect in the expected mode. Therefore, even if the expectation mode is selected as the first effect, the second effect can be surely performed, so that the player can surely have a sense of expectation due to the second effect. .

  The “normal reach fluctuation effect”, “super reach fluctuation effect”, and “special reach fluctuation effect” described in the above embodiment correspond to the “expectation mode”.

  The aspect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means according to claim A1 or A2 is that, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information stops during the dynamic display. And a normal mode in which a display result other than the combination of the predetermined identification information is displayed without the expected mode and the expected mode in which the stopped identification information constitutes a part of the combination of the predetermined identification information. The aspect changing means changes the aspect of the first effect so that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed a plurality of times in the normal aspect. Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, as a first effect mode executed by the first effect executing means, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display and the stop is performed. If the identification information includes an expected aspect that constitutes a part of a predetermined combination of identification information and a normal aspect that displays a display result other than the predetermined combination of identification information without the expected aspect, The mode of the first effect is changed by the mode changing means so that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed a plurality of times in the normal mode. In the dynamic display of the identification information according to the normal mode, if the display result other than the combination of the predetermined identification information is displayed without the expected mode, the stop mode can be freely set. When the second effect is performed by stopping the dynamic display in a predetermined stop mode, the second effect can be easily performed with respect to the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the normal mode. Therefore, even if an arbitrary effect mode is selected as the first effect, the second effect can be surely performed, so that the player can be sure to have a sense of expectation due to the second effect. Can do. In addition, by changing the dynamic display mode of the identification information set by the mode changing unit to the normal mode, the normal mode prepared as the mode of the first effect can be used as it is. There is no need to prepare separate display data for the dynamic display of the identification information set multiple times by the means. Thereby, the increase in the storage capacity for storing the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information can be suppressed. Note that the “out-of-range variation effect” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “normal mode”.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the mode change unit is configured to identify the plurality of times when the time allocated to the mode of the first effect detected by the mode detection unit is a predetermined time or more. A game characterized in that in at least one dynamic display of information dynamic display, the aspect of the first effect is changed so that the third effect is performed during the dynamic display. Machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, when the time allocated to the first effect mode detected by the mode detection unit is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, at least the dynamic display of the identification information is performed at least by the mode change unit. In one dynamic display, the aspect of the first effect is changed so that the third effect is performed during the dynamic display. Thereby, when the time allocated to the aspect of the 1st production detected by the aspect detection means is more than predetermined time, at least among the dynamic display of the multiple times of identification information distributed by the aspect change means Since the third effect is performed during one dynamic display, the time required for the dynamic display in which the third effect is performed can be increased by the time required for the third effect. In other words, it is possible to set a long time for at least one dynamic display among the dynamic display of a plurality of times of identification information distributed by the aspect change means, so that the identification information distributed by the aspect change means The number of dynamic displays can be reduced. Therefore, in the first production performed by the establishment of the one start condition, usually, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed once. However, by the distribution of the dynamic display of the identification information by the mode changing means, Since the dynamic display is frequently performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Here, the third effect is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that a predetermined combination of identification information may appear in the dynamic display of the identification display in which the third effect is performed. In addition, in the dynamic display of the identification display in which the third effect is performed, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is the predetermined identification information. If it is an expected aspect that constitutes a part of the combination, it may be an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that a predetermined combination of identification information appears. The third effect may be performed in the first effect in which the second effect is not added by the aspect changing unit. In this case, the third effect performed during the dynamic display distributed by the mode changing means using the data for the third effect performed in the first effect to which the second effect is not added. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately prepare data for the third presentation performed during the dynamic display distributed by the aspect changing means. Thereby, an increase in storage capacity for storing the third effect performed during the dynamic display of the identification information can be suppressed. The “notice effect” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “third effect”.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the dynamic display of the identification information includes a first period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic mode in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, In the dynamic display of at least one time among the dynamic displays of the identification information a plurality of times based on the time allocated to the aspect of the first effect detected by the aspect detection means, the first The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that after adjusting the time required for the period, the aspect of the first effect is changed.

  Here, the dynamic aspect that is difficult to visually recognize may be an aspect in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at high speed, or an aspect in which the identification information itself is displayed in a small size. Alternatively, a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed may be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in the dynamic display of the identification information, when the identification information includes a first period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the first detected by the mode detection unit. Adjustment such as extending or shortening the time required for the first period in at least one dynamic display of the dynamic display of identification information based on the time allocated to the aspect of the presentation Then, the aspect of the first effect is changed by the aspect changing means. Thereby, the time required for the dynamic display of each identification information can be adjusted by adjusting such as extending or shortening the time required for the first period. Can be distributed to a plurality of times of dynamic display of identification information without leaving time in the time allotted to the first performance. Also, for example, by using an image prepared for dynamic display of identification information before the time is adjusted, an image corresponding to a predetermined time is removed from the image, or the image is displayed repeatedly. By shortening or extending the time, the time for shortening or extending the time can be set to an arbitrary time. In addition, since the period for which the time is shortened or extended is a period during which dynamic display is performed in a dynamic manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, discontinuity in the dynamic display of identification information by removing or repeating the image It can suppress that sex is recognized with respect to a player. In addition to the dynamic display of the normal identification information before the time is adjusted, it is not necessary to prepare a separate image exclusively for the first effect whose time is adjusted, so the first effect is adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing images.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the second effect executing means causes a predetermined combination of identification information to appear after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped. The second effect is executed, and the mode changing unit is configured to perform the identification information for a plurality of times based on the time allocated to the mode of the first effect detected by the mode detecting unit. In at least one dynamic display of the dynamic display, after a part of the identification information is retained during the dynamic display, at least a part of the retained identification information is dynamically displayed again, The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the aspect of the first effect is changed so that the predetermined combination of identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine A6, after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped, the second effect executing means generates the second effect by causing the identification information of a predetermined combination to appear. In the case of being executed, in the dynamic display of at least one time among the dynamic displays of the plurality of identification information based on the time allocated to the mode of the first effect detected by the mode detection means, After the part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the target display, at least a part of the stopped identification information is dynamically displayed again so that the predetermined combination of identification information appears. The aspect of the first effect is changed. In this way, by dynamically displaying at least a part of the stopped identification information again, it is possible to adjust the time required for the dynamic display of the identification information. Within the time allotted to one production, it is possible to distribute the dynamic display of identification information multiple times without leaving time. Further, by dynamically displaying at least a part of the identification information that has been stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a predetermined combination of identification information is displayed. It is possible to provide an effect that does not get bored.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the aspect changing unit is configured to cause the first effect to be generated by the aspect changing unit based on a time allocated to the first effect aspect detected by the aspect detecting unit. For each of the plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information that is changed from the above aspect, a change mode setting unit that sets the display mode is provided, and the identification information is displayed a plurality of times in the display mode set by the change mode setting unit. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the mode of the first effect is changed so that the dynamic display is performed.

  Here, the display mode set by the change mode setting means may determine the time during which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the identification information. Then, it may be determined whether to dynamically display at least a part of the identification information stopped during the dynamic display. Further, it may be determined whether or not another effect (for example, “third effect” described in the gaming machine A4) is performed during the dynamic display of the identification information. Alternatively, the time required for the dynamic display of the identification information may be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A7, based on the time allocated to the mode of the first effect detected by the mode detection unit, the mode change unit sets the first effect by the mode change unit provided in the mode change unit. The display mode is set for each of the dynamic display of identification information multiple times changed from the above mode. And the aspect of a 1st effect is changed by the aspect change means so that the dynamic display of identification information may be performed a plurality of times in the display aspect set by the change aspect setting means. Thereby, the display mode of each of the dynamic displays of the plurality of identification information distributed by the mode change unit is appropriately set in the time allocated to the mode of the first effect detected by the mode detection unit. be able to. Further, in this case, for each of the times allocated to the plurality of first presentation modes, the display mode to be set for each of the dynamic display of the plurality of identification information changed from the first presentation mode. Corresponding storage means is provided in the sub-control means, and the change setting means is configured to dynamically identify the identification information for a plurality of times associated with the time that is deducted from the aspect of the first effect detected by the aspect detection means. By reading the display mode to be set for each display from the storage unit, the display mode may be set for each of the dynamic displays of the identification information multiple times changed from the mode of the first effect by the mode changing unit. Good. Thereby, the display mode of each of the dynamic display of the identification information of the plurality of times distributed by the mode change unit can be appropriately and easily performed within the time allocated to the mode of the first effect detected by the mode detection unit. Can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines 12 to 15 and the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sub-control unit detects a mode of the first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting unit; When the aspect of the first effect detected by the aspect detection means is a predetermined effect aspect, a predetermined time is set in accordance with the stop of the predetermined effect aspect in the time allotted to the first effect. Second mode changing means for changing the mode of the first effect so that an operation is performed, and the second effect executing means is a first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting means. Is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect is executed in accordance with the stop of the first effect, and the mode of the first effect is changed by the second mode changing means. If the Gaming machine B1, characterized in that is to execute the second effect to suit.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the aspect of the first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting means is detected by the aspect detection means, and the detected first effect aspect is the predetermined effect aspect. The second mode changing means changes the mode of the first stage so that the predetermined operation is performed in accordance with the stop of the predetermined stage in the time allotted to the first stage. . And when the mode of the 1st production is changed by the 2nd mode change means, the 2nd production is performed by the 2nd production execution means according to predetermined operation. Here, the aspect of the first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting means is selected in advance by the selecting means before the second effect is added. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information is predetermined. When the second effect is performed by stopping in the stop mode, the first effect mode selected in advance by the selecting means is an effect mode in which the dynamic display of the identification information cannot be stopped in the predetermined stop mode. However, if the effect mode is set as the predetermined effect mode and the dynamic display is stopped in the predetermined stop mode in the predetermined operation performed in accordance with the stop of the predetermined effect mode, the second is easily performed. You can add production. Therefore, even if an arbitrary effect mode is selected as the first effect, the second effect can be surely performed, so that the player can be sure to have a sense of expectation due to the second effect. Can do. Even if the second effect is added by the setting means, the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means in the predetermined effect mode selected by the selection means, so that the predetermined effect mode is the player. If it is an effect mode that the player is looking forward to, the player can be satisfied by performing the predetermined effect mode.

  In the gaming machine B1, the second mode changing means stops the dynamic display as the predetermined operation after stopping the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined direction in the first stage. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that a part or all of the identification information stopped by the above is dynamically displayed again, and the aspect of the first effect is changed so as to stop the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine B2, after the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped in the predetermined production mode by changing the first production mode by the second mode changing unit, The first effect is performed by the first effect execution means in such a manner that the part or all of the identification information stopped by the stop of the display is dynamically displayed again and the dynamic display is stopped. The second effect is performed by the second effect executing means in accordance with the predetermined operation. As a result, in the first effect, when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped in the predetermined effect mode, even if the combination of the predetermined identification information does not appear, it is moved again thereafter. By performing the target display, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of presentation will be performed. And a 2nd effect is performed according to the dynamic display, and it can make a player have a predetermined | prescribed expectation further.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second mode changing means continues to display a part or all of the stopped identification information while maintaining the display mode of the identification information stopped by the stop of the dynamic display as the predetermined operation. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the mode of the first effect is changed so as to dynamically display again and stop the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine B3, after the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped in the predetermined production mode by the second mode changing unit being changed by the second mode changing unit, The first effect is performed by the first effect execution means in such a manner that a part or all of the stopped identification information is dynamically displayed again while the display mode of the identification information stopped by the stop of the display is maintained. Is called. Accordingly, in the first effect, after the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped in the predetermined effect mode, the dynamic display is performed again while the display mode of the identification information stopped by the stop is maintained. By the dynamic display performed again, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that some effect will be performed following the dynamic display of the identification information performed in a predetermined manner.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the predetermined operation, the second mode changing unit again performs a dynamic mode in which a part or all of the identification information stopped by the stop of the dynamic display is visible to the player. The gaming machine B4 is characterized by changing the mode of the first effect so as to dynamically display and stop the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped in the predetermined production mode after the first production mode is changed by the second mode changing unit, A part or all of the identification information stopped by the stop of the display is dynamically displayed again in a dynamic manner that can be visually recognized by the player, and the dynamic effect is stopped. Performed by the production execution means. Thus, in the first effect, when the dynamic display of the identification information is performed again after the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped in the predetermined effect mode, the player is dynamically displayed. Since the identification information can be visually recognized, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation that the second effect will be performed while recognizing the content of the dynamically displayed identification information.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the predetermined effect mode includes a first period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic mode in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the second mode change unit includes When the aspect of the first effect detected by the aspect detection means is a predetermined effect aspect, the first period in the predetermined effect aspect is shortened by a predetermined time and the shortened predetermined The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the aspect of the first effect is changed so that the predetermined operation is performed in time.

  Here, the dynamic aspect that is difficult to visually recognize may be an aspect in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at high speed, or an aspect in which the identification information itself is displayed in a small size. Alternatively, a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed may be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in the predetermined production mode, when the identification information includes a first period of dynamic display in a dynamic mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the first production detected by the mode detection unit. When the mode is a predetermined production mode, the second period is set such that the first period in the predetermined production mode is shortened by a predetermined time and the predetermined operation is performed in the shortened predetermined time. The aspect of the first effect is changed by the aspect changing means. As described above, the first period in the predetermined effect mode is shortened by a predetermined time, and the predetermined operation is set to be performed in the shortened predetermined time. In particular, a predetermined operation can be surely performed in accordance with the stop of the predetermined effect mode. In addition, when the time is shortened by removing the image corresponding to the predetermined time from the image prepared for the predetermined effect mode and displaying the image, the time during which the time is shortened is a dynamic that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since the period is dynamically displayed in the mode, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the dynamic display of the identification information by removing the image.

  In the gaming machines 1 to 15, the gaming machines A1 to A7, and the gaming machines B1 to B5, if the permission transmitting means determines that the second effect is to be performed by the determining means, the second effect is executed. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit together with information based on the random information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the sub-control unit is executed by the first effect execution unit. Is transmitted by at least a part of the first effect waiting for the second effect to the setting state determining means for determining whether or not the second effect is applied by the setting means. If the setting state determining means determines that the second effect is added to at least a part of the first effect when the permission command is received, In the random information transmitted together with the combination of the identification information that appears after all the first effects to which two effects have been added are executed by the first effect executing means, and the permission command. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a determination unit for determining whether to add the second effect to the first effect by the setting unit according to the information based on the information.

  Here, when the permission transmission means transmits the permission command to the sub-control means together with the information based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means, the information based on the random information is included in the permission command. Information based on random information may be transmitted by a command different from the permission command. It should be noted that the “game status flag after continuous notice” included in the “holding number command” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “information based on random information”.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit is received, the setting state determining unit adds the second effect to the at least part of the first effect by the setting unit. If it is determined that all the first effects to which the second effect is added are transmitted together with the combination of identification information that appears after the first effect execution means is executed and the permission command. In accordance with the information based on the random information, whether or not to newly add the second effect to the first effect by the setting unit is determined by the availability determination unit.

  Here, for example, after all the first effects to which the second effects have been added are executed by the first effect executing means, combinations other than the combination of predetermined identification information appear, and the second effects are again displayed. Is executed by the second execution means, and as a result, when a combination other than the combination of predetermined identification information appears again, no game value is given even though the second effect is repeatedly executed. The situation will continue and there is a risk that the player's expectation will be hindered. On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, in a situation in which a combination other than the combination of predetermined identification information appears after all the first effects with the second effects are executed by the first effect executing means. For example, if the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command suggests that a combination other than the combination of identification information set in advance in the first effect appears, the availability determination means Thus, it is possible to newly prevent the second effect from being added to the first effect by the setting means, and the state in which no game value is given continues even though the second effect is repeatedly executed. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's sense of expectation is inhibited.

  On the other hand, in a situation where combinations other than the combination of predetermined identification information appear after all the first effects to which the second effects are added are executed by the first effect executing means, for example, in combination with the permission command If the information based on the random information transmitted in this way suggests that a combination of identification information set in advance in the first effect appears, the setting means newly sets the first A second effect can be added to the effect, and when the second effect is performed again, the player is given a sense of expectation that a combination of predetermined identification information will appear as a result. In contrast, since the player can be strongly held, motivation for continuing the game can be given to the player. In this way, a combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added has been executed by the first effect execution means, and random information transmitted together with the permission command In accordance with the information based on the game, it can be determined whether or not to newly add the second effect according to the player's expectation, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player. it can.

  In the gaming machine C1, the availability determination unit is configured as the combination of the identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing unit. In the case of a combination other than a predetermined combination of identification information, the setting means newly adds the second effect to the first effect according to information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command. The game machine C2 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to add the effect.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added is executed by the first effect executing means is a combination other than a predetermined combination of identification information. In the case of the combination, whether or not to newly add the second effect to the first effect by the setting means according to the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command by the permission determination means. To be judged. Accordingly, for example, if the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command suggests that a combination other than the combination of identification information set in advance in the first effect appears, it is acceptable. The determination means can newly prevent the setting means from adding the second effect to the first effect, and the game value is not given even though the second effect is repeatedly executed. Can be prevented from continuing. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's sense of expectation is inhibited. On the other hand, if the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command suggests that a combination of identification information set in advance in the first effect appears, it is newly determined by the availability determination means. The second effect can be added to the first effect by the setting means, and when the second effect is performed again, an expected combination of predetermined identification information appears as a result. Since a feeling can be strongly given to the player, a motivation to continue the game can be given to the player. In this way, the combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects with the second effects added are executed by the first effect executing means is a combination other than the combination of the predetermined identification information. In some cases, according to the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command, it can be determined whether or not to newly add the second effect according to the expectation received by the player. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player.

  In the gaming machine C2, the availability determination unit is configured as the combination of the identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing unit. When it is a combination other than a predetermined combination of identification information, information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command is a combination other than the predetermined combination of identification information in the first effect. The game machine C3 is characterized in that it is determined that the second effect is not added to the first effect by the setting means if it is suggested to make the game appear.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added is executed by the first effect executing means is other than a predetermined combination of identification information. If the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command suggests that a combination other than the combination of identification information predetermined in the first effect appears. The determination unit determines that the second effect is not added to the first effect by the setting unit. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a state in which no game value is given even though the second effect is repeatedly executed, and thus it is possible to suppress a player's expectation from being hindered. it can.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the availability determination means is a combination of the identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect execution means. When the combination is a combination other than the predetermined combination of identification information, the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command is the combination of the predetermined identification information in the first effect. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, if it is suggested to make it appear, the setting means newly determines that the second effect is added to the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added is executed by the first effect executing means is a combination other than a predetermined combination of identification information. If the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command suggests that a combination of identification information predetermined in the first effect appears, the possibility determination is made. By the means, it is determined that the second effect is newly added to the first effect by the setting means. As a result, when the second performance is performed again, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that a combination of predetermined identification information appears as a result. Motivation to continue the game can be given.

  In the gaming machine C4, the sub-control unit is configured as the combination of the identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing unit. Information based on the random information that is a combination other than a predetermined combination of identification information and transmitted together with the permission command causes the combination of the predetermined identification information to appear in the first effect. If it is determined by the setting means that the second effect is to be added to the first effect by the availability determination means, the setting means newly As the effect mode of the second effect added to the first effect, the effect mode of the second effect already added to the first effect is different. Gaming machine C5, characterized in that it comprises a mode setting means for setting a that manner.

  According to the gaming machine C5, as a combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing means, other than a combination of predetermined identification information Based on the fact that the information based on the random information transmitted together with the permission command causes the combination of the identification information predetermined in the first effect to appear, by the availability determination means When the setting means newly determines that the second effect is to be added to the first effect, the aspect setting means newly sets the second effect effect form added to the first effect by the setting means. An aspect different from the effect aspect of the second effect already added to the first effect is set. Thus, the second effect newly added to the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means in an effect mode different from the second effect already added to the first effect. Therefore, even if a combination other than a predetermined combination of identification information appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing means, In addition, when the second effect is executed again by the second effect executing means, the effect mode of the second effect changes from the previous second effect, so that the combination of identification information determined in advance is It is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the sub-control means determines that the setting means does not add the second effect to the first effect, the sub-control means newly A gaming machine C6, further comprising a setting non-execution unit that does not execute the setting of adding the second production to the first production by the setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when it is determined by the availability determining means that the second effect is not added to the first effect by the setting means, the setting means is newly executed by the setting means. The setting for adding the second effect to the effect is not executed. Thereby, when it is newly determined by the setting means that the second effect is not added to the first effect, the setting for adding the second effect to the first effect is not performed reliably and easily. can do. Further, by making the setting by the setting means unexecuted, an increase in processing load on the sub-control means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the setting means adds to the first effect based on receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means regardless of the determination by the permission determining means. The second effect is set to be executable, and the determination unit newly determines that the second effect is not added to the first effect by the setting unit. A gaming machine C7, comprising: setting erasing means for erasing the setting of the second effect newly added to the first effect based on receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the second effect can be executed in addition to the first effect on the basis of receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means regardless of the determination by the permission determining means. Set by means. Then, if the determination unit determines that the second effect is not added to the first effect by the setting unit, the first effect is based on receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit. The setting of the second effect newly added to is deleted by the setting deleting means. Thereby, when it is newly determined by the setting means that the second effect is not added to the first effect, the setting for adding the second effect to the first effect is surely not performed. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the permission command includes information based on the random information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the permission transmission unit includes information based on the random information. A gaming machine C8, which transmits the permission command to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the permission command is configured to include information based on random information acquired by the acquiring unit, and the permission command including information based on the random information is transmitted by the permission transmitting unit. It is transmitted to the sub control means. Thereby, the information based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means is transmitted and received from the main control means to the sub-control means together with the permission to execute the second effect by one permission command. The processing load of each of the main control means and the sub control means is increased compared to the case where information based on the random information is transmitted and received from the main control means to the sub control means by a signal different from the permission command for permitting the execution of Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machines 1 to 15, gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machines B1 to B5, and gaming machines C1 to C8, the sub-control means includes the first effect that is waited for execution by the first effect executing means. At least in part, when receiving the setting command determining means for determining whether or not the second effect is applied by the setting means and the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means, If the setting state determining means determines that the second effect is added to at least a part of the effects of the first effect, the first effect execution means waits for execution of the first effect Based on the number of first effects in which the second effect is not set by the setting means, the second effect is newly set in the first effect in which the second effect is not set by the setting means. of Gaming machine D1, characterized in that it comprises a second possibility determining section for determining whether or not added out.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit is received, the setting state determining unit adds the second effect to the at least part of the first effect by the setting unit. Is determined based on the number of first effects in which the second effect has not been set by the setting means among the first effects that have been waited for by the first effect executing means. Whether or not the second effect is added to the first effect for which the second effect is not set by the means is determined by the second availability determination means. Thus, when the number of first effects in which the second effect has not been set by the setting means is a predetermined number, the second possibility determination means newly sets the second effect to the first effect by the setting means. If it is determined that an effect is to be added, after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing means, in addition to the execution of the first effect by the first effect executing means again. When the second effect is performed by the second effect executing means, the continuous number of times that the second effect is performed (the number of first effects in which the second effect is newly added) is set to a predetermined number of times. Can be determined. Therefore, when the second effect is repeatedly executed, the player can easily recognize that the second effect is being executed with respect to the player with the number of consecutive second effects executed after the second effect. Can be set to the number of times that the player can increase the expectation for the second performance, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the second availability determination means receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means, the second effect is added to at least a part of the first effect. And the combination of the identification information appearing after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added are executed by the first effect executing means. If it is a combination of predetermined identification information, the second effect is not set by the setting unit anew based on the number of first effects that the second effect is not set by the setting unit. A gaming machine D2 that determines whether or not to add the second effect to the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine D2, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit is received, the setting effect determining unit adds the second effect to the at least part of the first effect by the setting unit. If the combination of identification information that is determined and appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added is executed by the first effect executing means is a combination of identification information that is determined in advance, Based on the number of first effects in which the second effect has not been set by the setting means among the first effects that have been waited for by the first effect executing means, a second effect is newly set by the setting means. Whether or not to add the second effect to the first effect that has not been set is determined by the second availability determination means. Here, when the combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effect has been added is executed by the first effect executing means is a combination of identification information that has been determined in advance. Since a predetermined game value is given to the player, the player's sense of expectation due to the second effect is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, in such a state, when the second effect is executed again, the player recognizes that the second effect is started from the beginning, and therefore, the number of consecutive times of the second effect executed again is If there are few, there exists a possibility that a player may not recognize a 2nd effect or weaken the expectation with respect to a 2nd effect with respect to a player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D2, the combination of identification information that appears after all the first effects to which the second effects have been added is executed by the first effect executing means is the predetermined identification information. In the case of the combination, it is easily recognized that the second effect is executed for the player, or the second effect is executed for the player. Since it can be set to the number of times that the sense of expectation can be strengthened, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D 1 or D 2, the second availability determining unit newly sets the second setting unit when the number of first effects in which the second effect is not set by the setting unit is at least 2 or more. It is determined that the second effect is to be added to the first effect in which the second effect is not set.

  According to the gaming machine D3, when the number of first effects in which the second effect has not been set by the setting means is at least 2 or more, the second acceptability determining means newly sets the second effect by the setting means. It is determined that the second effect is added to the first effect whose effect is not set. As a result, a combination of predetermined identification information appears after all the first effects to which the second effects have been added are executed by the first effect executing means, and the player has a sense of expectation due to the second effects. Since the number of consecutive second effects that are executed again after the game is interrupted can be set to at least two times or more, it is easily recognized by the player that the second effect is being executed. Or the number of times that the player can increase the sense of expectation for the second performance, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the sub-control means determines that the second effect is not newly added to the first effect by the setting means by the second availability determination means The game further comprises second setting non-execution means for unexecuting a setting for adding the second effect to the first effect for which the second effect has not been set by the setting means. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, when it is determined by the second availability determination means that the second effect is not added to the first effect by the setting means, the setting is newly executed by the second setting non-execution means. The setting for adding the second effect to the first effect is not executed by the means. Thereby, when it is newly determined by the setting means that the second effect is not added to the first effect, the setting for adding the second effect to the first effect is not performed reliably and easily. can do. Further, by making the setting by the setting means unexecuted, an increase in processing load on the sub-control means can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the setting means receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means regardless of the determination by the second availability determination means, and the first effect In addition to the above, the second effect is set to be executable, and it is determined by the second availability determination means that the second effect is not newly added to the first effect by the setting means. In this case, the apparatus further comprises second setting erasing means for erasing the setting of the second effect newly added to the first effect based on receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the second effect can be executed in addition to the first effect based on the reception of the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit regardless of the determination by the second availability determination unit. Are set by setting means. When the second availability determination unit newly determines that the setting unit does not add the second effect to the first effect, the first determination is based on receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting unit. The setting of the second effect newly added to the effect is deleted by the second setting deleting unit. Thereby, when it is newly determined by the setting means that the second effect is not added to the first effect, the setting for adding the second effect to the first effect is surely not performed. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 15, gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machines B1 to B5, gaming machines C1 to C8, and gaming machines D1 to D5, the first rendering executed by the first rendering execution means A standby number acquisition unit for acquiring a standby number; and a command generation unit for generating a standby number command based on the standby number acquired by the standby number acquisition unit; When it is determined that the second effect is to be performed, permission information for permitting execution of the second effect is included in the standby frequency command generated by the command generation unit, and the standby frequency command is then permitted. A gaming machine E1 which is transmitted as a command to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the number of standby times of the first effect executed by the first effect executing unit is acquired by the standby number acquiring unit, and a standby number command is generated based on the acquired number of standby times. If the determination means determines that the second effect is to be performed, the permission transmission means includes permission information for permitting execution of the second effect in the waiting number command, and the waiting number command is It is transmitted as a permission command to the sub-control means. As a result, the sub-control means can accurately grasp the permission information for permitting the execution of the second effect, and the first effect execution means to which the second effect is added waits for the execution of the first effect. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of standby times for production. Therefore, the control can be facilitated as compared with the case where the number of times of waiting for the first effect and the permission information are transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means by another command. Moreover, since the number of commands can be notified from the main control means to the sub-control means by one command for the number of standby times, the number of standby times for the first effect and the permission information for permitting the execution of the second effect can be notified. It is possible to suppress the increase, and it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load related to command transmission / reception.

  One of the gaming machines 1 to 15, gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machines B1 to B5, gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machines D1 to D5 and gaming machine E1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine F1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of gaming machines 1 to 15, gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machines B1 to B5, gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machines D1 to D5 and gaming machine E1, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine F2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines 1 to 15, gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machines B1 to B5, gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machines D1 to D5 and gaming machine E1, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that starts when a ball enters (wins) the entrance (starting entrance). For example, the effective display area has a total of 3 or 3 × 3 cells horizontally or vertically. Nine symbols and the like are displayed, and the symbols and the like displayed based on a predetermined game condition are scrolled. When the scrolling stops, the stop symbols are in a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. A big hit is generated in some cases.
In addition, during scrolling of symbols, etc., an entertainment effect that suggests in advance that a gaming state (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player with a higher probability than normal times may occur in advance (for example, an effect by reach display, etc.) In order to provide a player with a sense of expectation for an advantageous game, an attempt has been made. The effect of reach display is, for example, by stopping the left and right two symbol rows among the three symbol rows being scrolled at a predetermined symbol, and then scrolling the middle one symbol row at a low speed, On the other hand, this is an effect that gives a sense of expectation to stop at a predetermined combination of stop symbols. The effect by the reach display is performed for a longer time than the normal variation effect (variation effect without the reach display) in order to give the player a higher expectation.
Now, there is also known a gaming machine that suggests a transition to an advantageous gaming state as a pattern of an entertaining effect by an effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect”) that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable effects. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Utility Model Laid-Open No. 7-24383).
However, the conventional gaming machine that performs the continuous notice effect has a problem that the interest in stopping the symbol in the variable effect is low.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in stopping a symbol in a changing effect.

110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (sub control means)
223a Retention count counter S403, S405 (selection means)
S504 (detection means)
S604 (Acquisition means)
S607, S609, S610 (transmission means)
S1009 Continuous notice determination processing (setting means)
S1301, S1304, S1306 (determination means)
S1309, S1311 (determination means)
S1310, S1312, S1313 (part of pseudo-variation execution means)
S1607 (part of dynamic display execution means, predetermined effect execution means, and pseudo variation execution means)

Claims (2)

Detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition, acquisition means for obtaining information when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means, and identification information based on the information obtained by the acquisition means A main control means having a selection means for selecting a type of dynamic display; and the identification corresponding to the dynamic display type of the identification information selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means Sub-control means having dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of information, and a combination of predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when
The main control means includes
A transmission unit that transmits a predetermined command for controlling the dynamic display of the identification information to the sub-control unit;
The sub-control means is
The number of standby times of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means can be stored,
Based on receiving the predetermined command transmitted by the transmission unit, a setting unit configured to set a predetermined effect to be executable in the dynamic display of the identification information within the stored number of standby times, and the identification Determination means for determining the type of dynamic display of information, and performing dynamic display of the identification information,
Run the previous SL predetermined effect based on the setting of the setting means,
When the determination unit determines that the type of dynamic display of identification information is a predetermined type, the movement of the identification information within the time allotted to the type of dynamic display of the predetermined identification information. includes a pseudo variation execution means indication pseudo stop of executing the dynamic display of the identification information to divide the line,
Means for generating a predetermined sound in accordance with the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information when the predetermined effect is not executed;
When the predetermined effect is executable set by the setting unit based on received said predetermined command transmitted by the transmitting means, the predetermined in accordance with the dynamic display of stop of the identification information A sound different from the sound is generated, and a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information, or a predetermined movable effect means is moved or a predetermined light-emitting effect is executed by a predetermined illumination means Means,
When dividing dynamic display pseudo-stop line of the pseudo variation the identification information by the execution unit, generating a different sound from the predetermined voice in accordance with the dynamic display pseudo stop of the identification information and means, the,
The pseudo-variation executing means includes a plurality of types of times that the dynamic display of the identification information can be stopped in a pseudo manner.
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting means includes means for setting execution of the predetermined effect when the number of standby times of the dynamic display of the stored identification information is a predetermined number or more . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

Images